australian qualifications framework - training · 2.6.1 general resources 2.6.2 specific assessment...
TRANSCRIPT
CONTENTS
Introduction ................................................................................................................................ 1 Australian Qualifications Framework ....................................................................................... 5 TDT51002 Diploma of Logistics Management .................................................................................................. 6 TDT61002 Advanced Diploma of Logistics Management ................................................................................. 8 A Handling Cargo/Stock TDTA2798B Evaluate and Select Bulk Handling and Storage Resources ........................................................ 10 TDTA2998B Plan and Manage Storage of Dangerous Goods and Hazardous Substances ............................. 18 TDTA3401A Manage Global Freight Operations ............................................................................................... 25 TDTA3501A Manage International Freight Transfer .......................................................................................... 33 TDTA3601A Manage Handling and Storage of Perishable Food Products ....................................................... 41 B Equipment Checking and Maintenance TDTB1098B Plan and Implement Maintenance Schedules .............................................................................. 48 D Load Handling TDTD2598B Plan Loading of Dangerous Goods ............................................................................................... 55 TDTD2698B Plan and Organise Movement and Storage of Bulk Materials....................................................... 62 F Occupational Health and Safety TDTF1701A Investigate Rail Safety Incidents ................................................................................................... 70 TDTF2001A Manage Emergencies ................................................................................................................... 76 TDTF5701A Apply the ‘Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network’ to Interface Coordination
Management ................................................................................................................................. 82 TDTF5901A Apply ‘Code Of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network’ to Operations, Human
Resources and Safeworking ......................................................................................................... 90 J Quality TDTJ798B Conduct Internal Quality Audits..................................................................................................... 99 K Computers and Technology TDTK698B Evaluate Software Requirements and Hardware Enhancements ............................................... 106 L Resource Management TDTL1298B Apply Workplace Knowledge to Plan Improvements to Operations ........................................... 112 TDTL1398B Establish and Manage Effective Workplace Relations ............................................................... 120 TDTL1498B Evaluate and Select Warehouse Resources............................................................................... 127 TDTL1598B Manage Change Processes within the Organisation .................................................................. 134 TDTL1798B Plan Domestic Transport Logistics ............................................................................................. 141 TDTL1898B Select Employees........................................................................................................................ 148 TDTL1998B Implement and Monitor Transport Logistics ................................................................................ 154 TDTL2098B Develop and Maintain Operational Procedures for Transport and Distribution Enterprises........ 162 TDTL2601A Manage Export Logistics ............................................................................................................. 170 BSBMGT502A Manage People Performance ..................................................................................................... 179
O Security TDTO598B Plan and Manage Security Procedures for the Enterprise .......................................................... 186 TDTO698B Plan and Manage Security Procedures for Transferring and Transporting Dangerous Goods... 193 P Business Planning TDTP398B Implement, Maintain and Evaluate Dangerous Goods Transport Procedures within the
Workplace ................................................................................................................................... 202 TDTP498B Develop a Transport and Distribution Business Plan ................................................................. 210 TDTP698B Establish International Distribution Networks ............................................................................. 218 TDTP798B Contribute to the Development of a Workplace Learning Environment ...................................... 225 TDTP898B Manage a Transport and Distribution Business Unit .................................................................. 231 TDTP998B Plan And Maintain Warehouse Layouts And Inventory Locations .............................................. 238 TDTP1198B Develop and Evaluate Strategies for Transport and Distribution Enterprises ............................. 245 TDTP1201A Plan Train Support Activities ....................................................................................................... 253 Q Financial Management TDTQ298B Set and Achieve Budget.............................................................................................................. 261 TDTQ598B Set, Monitor and Evaluate Budgets for Business Units .............................................................. 266 R Contract and Procurement TDTR398B Negotiate a Contract ................................................................................................................... 273 U Environment TDTU601A Conduct Environmental Audits ................................................................................................... 278 Contextualisation ............................................................................................................................................ 284 Note: The following units are listed within the qualifications framework and can be imported from the Business
Services Training Package. They have not been reformatted for inclusion as detailed units within the Transport and Distribution Training Package but may be regarded as 'inbuilt imported units'. Details of the units can be obtained by reference to the Business Services Training Package • BSBMGT505A Establish and Maintain an OHS System to Ensure a Safe Workplace • BSBMGT606A Manage Customer Focus • BSBHHR505A Manage Remuneration and Employee Benefits • BSBHHR509A Manage Rehabilitation/Return to Work Programs • BSBMGT608A Manage Innovation and Continuous Improvement • BSBEBUS603A Evaluate New Technologies for Business • BSBMGT609A Manage Risk • BSBMGT604A Manage Business Operations
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
1
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS OF OTHER VOLUMES IN THE ENDORSED COMPONENTS OF THE TRAINING PACKAGE The Transport and Distribution Training Package (Code TDT02) is organised into nine volumes for the convenience of users. The contents of each volume are summarised below:
VOLUME 1 OVERVIEW AND
USER GUIDELINES
VOLUME 2 ASSESSMENT GUIDELINES
VOLUME 3 ROAD
TRANSPORT QUALIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
VOLUME 4 WAREHOUSING AND STORAGE
QUALIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
VOLUME 5 STEVEDORING
QUALIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
VOLUME 9 LOGISTICS
MANAGEMENT QUALIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
VOLUME 8 TRANSPORT AND
DISTRIBUTION ADMINISTRATION QUALIFICATIONS
VOLUME 6 RAIL
OPERATIONS QUALIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
VOLUME 7 RAIL
INFRASTRUCTURE QUALIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS
AND STANDARDS
VOLUME 1 OVERVIEW AND USER GUIDELINES 1.1 What is a Training Package? 1.2 A Guide to the Organisation of the Training and Distribution Training Package 1.3 Scope of the Transport and Distribution Training Package 1.4 The Processes for the Development and Review of the Training Package 1.5 Licensing and Regulatory Considerations 1.6 Summary of the Changes Made as a Result of the Review of the Training Package 1.7 Common Units across Sectors 1.8 Importing of Units from Other Training Packages
VOLUME 2 ASSESSMENT GUIDELINES 2.1 Introduction
2.1.1 What are Assessment Guidelines? 2.1.2 Training And Regulatory Requirements In The Transport And Distribution Industry
2.2 Assessment System Overview 2.2.1 Benchmarks for Assessment 2.2.2 Australian Recognition Framework Assessment Requirements for RTOs 2.2.3 Mutual Recognition 2.2.4 Partnership Arrangements 2.2.5 Recording Assessment Outcomes
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
2
VOLUME 2 ASSESSMENT GUIDELINES cont. 2.2.6 Reporting Assessment Outcomes 2.2.7 Quality Assurance Mechanisms 2.2.8 Licensing Requirements 2.2.9 Assessment Pathways 2.2.10 Recognition of Prior Learning and Current Competency 2.2.11 Assessment of imported units 2.2.12 Review and Maintenance of the assessment System
2.3 Assessor Requirements 2.4 Designing Assessment Resources 2.5 Conducting Assessments 2.6 Further Sources
2.6.1 General Resources 2.6.2 Specific Assessment Resources
APPENDIX 1 Regulatory Requirements Applicable to the Transport and Distribution Industry and their Implications for Assessment within the Training Package
VOLUME 3 ROAD TRANSPORT QUALIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS 3.1 Introduction to Road Transport Qualifications and Standards 3.2 Road Transport Qualifications 3.3 Road Transport Standards 3.4 Importing of Units into Road Transport Qualifications 3.5 Road Transport Contextualisation Statement VOLUME 4 WAREHOUSING AND STORAGE QUALIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS 4.1 Introduction to Warehousing and Storage Qualifications and Standards 4.2 Warehousing and Storage Qualifications 4.3 Warehousing and Storage Standards 4.4 Importing of Units into Warehousing and Storage Qualifications 4.5 Warehousing and Storage Contextualisation Statement VOLUME 5 STEVEDORING QUALIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS 5.1 Introduction to Stevedoring Qualifications and Standards 5.2 Stevedoring Qualifications 5.3 Stevedoring Standards 5.4 Importing of Units into Stevedoring Qualifications 5.5 Stevedoring Contextualisation Statement VOLUME 6 RAIL OPERATIONS QUALIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS 6.1 Introduction to Rail Operations Qualifications and Standards 6.2 Rail Operations Qualifications 6.3 Rail Operations Standards 6.4 Importing of Units into Rail Operations Qualifications 6.5 Rail Operations Contextualisation Statement VOLUME 7 RAIL INFRASTRUCTURE QUALIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS 6.1 Introduction to Rail Infrastructure Qualifications and Standards 6.2 Rail Infrastructure Qualifications 6.3 Rail Infrastructure Standards 6.4 Importing of Units into Rail Infrastructure Qualifications 6.5 Rail Infrastructure Contextualisation Statement
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
3
VOLUME 8 TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION ADMINISTRATION QUALIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS 8.1 Introduction to Transport and Distribution Administration Qualifications and Standards 8.2 Transport and Distribution Administration Qualifications 8.3 Transport and Distribution Administration Standards 8.4 Importing of Units into Transport and Distribution Administration Qualifications 8.5 Transport and Distribution Administration Contextualisation Statement Each Competency Standards manual includes the framework which details the requirements for completion of a qualification, under the Australian Qualification Framework. The Transport and Distribution Training Package is subject to continuous improvement with new occupational areas and industry sectors being included as industry identifies the need. Before commencing any form of training or assessment, you must ensure delivery is from the current version of the Training Package. To ensure you are complying with this requirement:
Check the Print Version Number found just below the copyright statement on the imprint page of your current Training Package
Contact TDT Australia:
TDT Australia Level 1, 351 William Street
West Melbourne VIC 3003
Telephone: (03) 9320 4242 Fax: (03) 9320 4243
E-mail: [email protected] Website: http//:www.tdtaustralia.com
Access the TDT website (as above) and check the latest Print Version Number, which is displayed on
the Training Package order form. In addition, user’s comments and feedback on any aspect of the Training Package is encouraged and can be provided via the TDT web site. The National Training Information Service http://www.ntis.gov.au also displays any changes in units of competency and the packaging of qualifications. The modification history is also available on the website of Australian Training Products Limited: http://www.atpl.net.au/.
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
5
AUSTRALIAN QUALIFICATIONS FRAMEWORK
The Transport and Distribution Training Package provides significant flexibility to Registered Training Organisations, enterprises and individuals in packaging units together which lead to a qualification. This level of flexibility reflects the multiple job roles, enterprise requirements and changing technological nature of the industry. It is expected, however, that users of this Training Package will select units which, packaged together, provide a coherent qualification, inclusive of all the competencies necessary to fulfil occupational requirements. Importantly, the flexibility of packaging available within the qualifications framework must be considered within the responsibility of individuals, enterprises and/or industry codes of practice necessary at an occupational level. In packaging units together to form a training program, users should be aware of requirements set out in the Transport and Distribution Assessment Guidelines, and the Australian Quality Training Framework. The qualification framework within this manual provides the units available within each qualification level and requirements for completion of a qualification.
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
6
TDT51002 DIPLOMA OF LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT CHARACTERISTICS OF THE QUALIFICATION Title: Diploma of Logistics Management Rationale: A general qualification for the integrated management of logistics in the Road and Rail Transport, Warehousing, Storage, Stevedoring and allied Industries. Successful completion will require competency in units that relate to work defined as aligned at AQF Level 5.
Performance of a defined range of skilled operations, usually within a range of broader related activities involving known routines, methods and procedures, where some discretion and judgment is required in the selection of equipment, services or contingency measures and within known time constraints. Requirements for completion of the Qualification: A successful assessment outcome for:
(a) 7 units aligned at AQF 5 made up of: • at least 5 units and up to 7 units from those listed below (aligned at AQF 5), and • up to 2 suitable units (aligned at AQF 5) drawn with appropriate contextualisation from other relevant endorsed
Training Packages
plus (b) successful assessment against the underpinning knowledge component of 28 units (aligned at levels up to and
including AQF 4), made up of: • at least 20 units and up to 28 units (aligned at levels up to AQF 4) from other Transport and Distribution
qualifications, and • up to 8 suitable units (aligned at levels up to and including AQF 4) drawn with appropriate contextualisation,
from other relevant endorsed Training Packages FIELD UNIT
A Handling Cargo/Stock TDTA2798B Evaluate and Select Bulk Handling and Storage Resources TDTA2998B Plan and Manage Storage of Dangerous Goods and Hazardous
Substances TDTA3501A Manage International Freight Transfer TDTA3601A Manage Handling and Storage of Perishable Food Products
B Equipment Checking and Maintenance
TDTB1098B Plan and Implement Maintenance Schedules
D Load Handling TDTD2598B Plan Loading of Dangerous Goods TDTD2698B Plan and Organise Movement and Storage of Bulk Materials
F Occupational Health and Safety
TDTF1701A Investigate Rail Safety Incidents TDTF2001A Manage Emergencies TDTF5701A Apply the ‘Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network’ to
Interface Coordination Management TDTF5901A Apply the ‘Code Of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network’
to the Management of Operations, Human Resources and Safeworking
BSBMGT505A Establish and Maintain an OHS System to Ensure a Safe WorkplaceNote 1
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
7
TDT51002 DIPLOMA OF LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT J Quality TDTJ798B Conduct Internal Quality Audits
K Computers and Technology TDTK698B Evaluate Software Requirements And Hardware Enhancements
L Resource Management TDTL1298B Apply Workplace Knowledge to Plan Improvements to Operations TDTL1398B Establish and Manage Effective Workplace Relations TDTL1498B Evaluate and Select Warehouse Resources TDTL1598B Manage Change Processes Within The Organisation TDTL1898B Select Employees TDTL1998B Implement and Monitor Transport Logistics TDTL2098B Develop and Maintain Operational Procedures for Transport and
Distribution Enterprises TDTL2601A Manage Export Logistics BSBMGT502A Manage People Performance BSBHHR505A Manage Remuneration and Employee BenefitsNote 1 BSBHHR509A Manage Rehabilitation/Return to Work ProgramsNote 1
O Security
TDTO598B Plan and Manage Security Procedures for the Enterprise TDTO698B Plan and Manage Security Procedures for Transferring and
Transporting Dangerous Goods
P Business Planning TDTP698B Establish International Distribution Networks TDTP798B Contribute to the Development of a Workplace Learning Environment
Q Financial Management TDTQ298B Set and Achieve Budget
R Contract and Procurement TDTR398B Negotiate a Contract
U Environment
TDTU601A Conduct Environmental Audits
NOTE 1: The following units are listed within the qualifications framework and can be imported from the Business Services
Training Package. They are not currently being reformatted for inclusion as detailed units within the Transport and Distribution Training Package but may be regarded as 'inbuilt imported units'. Details of the units can be obtained by reference to the Business Services Training Package. • BSBMGT505A Establish and Maintain an OHS System to Ensure a Safe Workplace • BSBHHR505A Manage Remuneration and Employee Benefits • BSBHHR509A Manage Rehabilitation/Return to Work Programs
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
8
TDT61002 ADVANCED DIPLOMA OF LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT CHARACTERISTICS OF THE QUALIFICATION Title: Advanced Diploma of Logistics Management Rationale: A general qualification for the integrated management of logistics in the Road and Rail Transport, Warehousing, Storage, Stevedoring and allied Industries. Successful completion will require competency in units that relate to work defined as aligned at AQF Level 6.
Performance of a broad range of skilled applications including requirements to evaluate and analyse current practices, develop new criteria and procedures for performing current practices and provision of some leadership and guidance to others in the application and planning of the skills. Requirements for completion of the Qualification: A successful assessment outcome for a 14 units, comprising:
(a) 7 units aligned at AQF 6 made up of: • at least 4 units and up to 7 units from those listed below (aligned at AQF 6), and • up to 3 suitable units (aligned at AQF 6) drawn with appropriate contextualisation from other relevant endorsed
Training Packages
and (b) 7 units aligned at AQF 5 made up of:
• at least 5 units and up to 7 units from those listed below (aligned at AQF 5), and • up to 2 suitable units (aligned at AQF 5) drawn with appropriate contextualisation from other relevant endorsed
Training Packages
plus (c) successful assessment against the underpinning knowledge component of 28 units (aligned at levels up to and
including AQF 4), made up of: • at least 20 units and up to 28 units (aligned at levels up to AQF 4) from other Transport and Distribution
qualifications, and • up to 8 suitable units (aligned at levels up to and including AQF 4) drawn with appropriate contextualisation,
from other relevant endorsed Training Packages FIELD UNIT
A Handling Cargo/Stock TDTA3401A Manage Global Freight Operations
I Customer Service BSBMGT606A Manage Customer Focus Note 2
J Quality BSBMGT608A Manage Innovation and Continuous Improvement Note 2
K Computers and Technology BSBEBUS603A Evaluate New Technologies for BusinessNote 2
L Resource Management TDTL1798B Plan Domestic Transport Logistics BSBMGT609A Manage RiskNote 2 BSBMGT604A Manage Business OperationsNote 2
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
9
TDT61002 ADVANCED DIPLOMA OF LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT P Business Planning TDTP398B Implement, Maintain and Evaluate Dangerous Goods Transport
Procedures within the Workplace TDTP498B Develop a Transport and Distribution Business Plan TDTP898B Manage a Transport and Distribution Business Unit TDTP998B Plan and Maintain Warehouse Layouts and Inventory Locations TDTP1198B Develop and Evaluate Strategies for Transport and Distribution
Enterprises TDTP1201A Plan Train Support Activities
Q Financial Management
TDTQ598B Set, Monitor and Evaluate Budgets for Business Units
NOTE 2: The following units are listed within the qualifications framework and can be imported from the Business Services
Training Package. They are not currently being reformatted for inclusion as detailed units within the Transport and Distribution Training Package but may be regarded as 'inbuilt imported units'. Details of the units can be obtained by reference to the Business Services Training Package. • BSBMGT606A Manage Customer Focus • BSBMGT608A Manage Innovation and Continuous Improvement • BSBEBUS603A Evaluate New Technologies for Business • BSBMGT609A Manage Risk • BSBMGT604A Manage Business Operations
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
10
TDTA2798B EVALUATE AND SELECT BULK HANDLING AND STORAGE RESOURCES
Field A Handling Cargo/Stock DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to evaluate and select bulk handling and storage resources in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures including analysing storage requirements, scheduling work, organising activities, and evaluating and monitoring dangerous goods and hazardous substances storage compliance.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Analyse storage requirements
a. Legislative requirements and enterprise policies for the storage of hazardous substances and dangerous goods are identified
b. Hazard analysis for the types of goods are considered in accordance with workplace procedures
c. Options for the type and location of storage facilities are evaluated d. Selected site, content and storage facilities are documented in accordance
with enterprise policy and related regulations e. Signage/placarding is established/positioned in accordance with relevant
legislation
2. Schedule work a. Relocation/location schedule is compiled based on operational constraints and requirements and materials to be handled
b. Schedule is documented in accordance with workplace procedures c. Inspection and monitoring timetable is established d. Risk management strategy including development of contingency plans is
documented e. Relevant documentation concerning the storage of dangerous goods and
hazardous substances is circulated to appropriate personnel
3. Organise activities a. Personnel possessing the required competencies for handling and storing the goods are identified
b. (Any) required transportation, storage or monitoring equipment is arranged for site
c. Appropriate personnel are notified of planned activities d. Relevant permits and licences are obtained or checked for currency e. Schedule of observations and tests for the goods are determined and
communicated to relevant personnel f. Emergency management/incident training is arranged for affected employees
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
11
4. Evaluate and monitor dangerous goods and hazardous substances storage compliance
a. Reporting methods for monitoring of goods are identified, selected and implemented
b. Reporting relationships and channels of communication for forwarding monitoring outcomes are identified
c. Reviews of storage procedures and requirements are undertaken to comply with workplace procedures and regulatory requirements
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
12
Range Of Variables
EVALUATE AND SELECT BULK HANDLING AND STORAGE RESOURCES
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgement for self and others in planning and
using resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the warehousing,
storage, transport and distribution industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Services, products, risks, work systems and requirements potentially vary in different sections of the workplace
f. Customer and supplier contact and coordination is a requirement of these operations
g. Bulk handling equipment may include: g.1. conveyors g.2. chutes g.3. motorised equipment
h. Storage facilities may include: h.1. warehouses h.2. stockpiles h.3. silos h.4. containers
i. Storage may be: i.1. in bulk i.2. break bulk i.3. containerised i.4. unitised i.5. palletised
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
13
Range of Variables (continued)
EVALUATE AND SELECT BULK HANDLING AND STORAGE RESOURCES
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
j. Hazard analysis may include consideration of: j.1. quantity j.2. access j.3. co-storage/segregation requirements j.4. licensing requirements j.5. incident procedures j.6. provision of emergency equipment, facilities and procedures j.7. emergency requirements j.8. temperature/humidity control j.9. pressure control j.10. community consultation
k. Hazard management is consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before safe working practices and personal protective equipment
l. Consultative processes may involve: l.1. other employees and supervisors l.2. suppliers, potential customers and clients l.3. relevant authorities and institutions l.4. management and union representatives l.5. industrial relations and OHS specialists l.6. other maintenance, professional or technical staff
m. Communication in the work area may include: m.1. phone m.2. electronic data interchange (EDI) m.3. fax m.4. e-mail m.5. Internet m.6. RF communications m.7. barcode readers m.8. oral, aural or signed communications
n. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: n.1. company procedures n.2. enterprise procedures n.3. organisational procedures n.4. established procedures
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Information/documentation may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
bulk handling and storage. a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances
a.3. workplace operating procedures and policies a.4. supplier and/or client instructions a.5. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
14
Range of Variables (continued)
EVALUATE AND SELECT BULK HANDLING AND STORAGE RESOURCES
VARIABLE SCOPE
3. Sources of information/ documents
(continued)
a.6. manufacturer’s specifications and/or supplier's handling and storage advice
a.7. material safety data sheets a.8. workplace statistics a.9. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of load
shifting equipment and storage facilities a.10. Australian and International standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.11. communications technology equipment, oral, aural or signed
communications a.12. quality assurance standards and procedures a.13. emergency procedures a.14. relevant competency standards and training materials a.15. QA plans, data and document control a.16. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. relevant codes and regulations for bulk handling and storage a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including: a.2.1. Australian and International Dangerous Goods Codes a.2.2. Australian and International Explosives Codes
a.3. relevant Australian and international standards and certification requirements
a.4. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation in terms of duties of employers, employees, suppliers and contractors
a.5. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.6. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.7. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.8. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
15
Evidence Guide
EVALUATE AND SELECT BULK HANDLING AND STORAGE RESOURCES
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. select appropriate handling and storage resources a.2. specify performance measures for evaluating systems, facilities and
equipment a.3. manage own work to achieve workplace goals and required results a.4. suggest improvements to existing operations and negotiate changes a.5. identify requirements of tasks, and organise planning, job completion
and evaluation stages a.6. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.7. provide customer/client service and work effectively with others
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job role or function.
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international regulations relevant to bulk handling and storage
b. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the handling and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace procedures for the evaluation and selection of bulk handling and
storage resources d. Problems that may occur during the evaluation and selection of bulk
handling and storage resources and action that can be taken to resolve or report the problems
e. Hazards related to the evaluation and selection of bulk handling and storage resources and ways of controlling the risks involved
f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: f.1. focus of operation of inventory systems, resources, management and
workplace operating systems f.2. capability of equipment needed to complete the required tasks f.3. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.4. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.5. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills f.6. workplace business policies and plans including procedures for the
handling and storage of materials f.7. relevant workplace documentation procedures
g. Ability to: g.1. read and interpret technical data, drawings, instructions and manuals g.2. identify and solve problems that may arise during the evaluation and
selection of bulk handling and storage resources g.3. provide leadership to others g.4. plan and organise activities g.5. select and use appropriate application of technology, information
systems and procedures g.6 modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
16
Evidence Guide (continued)
EVALUATE AND SELECT BULK HANDLING AND STORAGE RESOURCES
4. Resource
implications a. Access is required to opportunities to:
a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to evaluate and select bulk handling and storage resources, and/or
a.2. evaluate and select bulk handling and storage resources in an appropriate range of operational warehousing, storage, transport and distribution contexts
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. selecting appropriate handling and storage resources a.2. specifying performance measures for evaluating systems, facilities and
equipment a.3. managing own work to achieve workplace goals and required results a.4. suggesting improvements to existing operations and negotiating
changes a.5. identifying requirements of tasks and organising planning, job
completion and evaluation stages a.6. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information a.7. providing customer/client service and working effectively with others
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements
including local and international regulations pertaining to bulk handling and storage
b.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the handling, storage and transport of dangerous goods, explosives and hazardous substances
b.3. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.4. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures) c. When allocating tasks consistently considers competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
17
Evidence Guide (continued)
EVALUATE AND SELECT BULK HANDLING AND STORAGE RESOURCES
6. Context for
assessment a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training
Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 3 3 2
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
18
TDTA2998B PLAN AND MANAGE STORAGE OF DANGEROUS GOODS AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
Field A Handling Cargo/Stock DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to plan and manage the storage of dangerous goods and hazardous substances in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures including the ADG Code. This includes defining the objectives of the required handling and storage operations, specifying equipment and system performance requirements, evaluating and selecting bulk handling and storage resources, and completing all required documentation.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Define objectives of required handling and storage operation
a. Requirements for bulk handling and storage activities are identified in accordance with workplace requirements
b. Current best practice and future trends for handling and storage equipment are assessed and compared to present operations
c. Consideration of workplace goals and present capabilities and constraints is undertaken in selecting bulk handling and storage resources
2. Specify equipment and system performance requirements
a. Bulk handling and storage equipment and system requirements are documented
b. Performance measures for equipment and system operations are developed and documented
c. Consultations are conducted with relevant employees and management to verify documented requirements
3. Evaluate and
select bulk handling and storage resources
a. The range of bulk handling and storage equipment and facilities which meet specifications are researched for costs and benefits including potential adaptability for new business opportunities
b. A rating system is instigated to facilitate comparisons of cost/benefit and other qualitative properties of bulk handling and storage equipment and systems
c. An analysis of current employee competency to required competency is undertaken and documented
d. Equipment is selected based on comparisons of performance specifications including cost, output, set up requirements, maintenance and retraining
4. Complete
documentation a. Workplace documentation is completed as appropriate b. Handling and storage requirements are documented and communicated to
relevant personnel c. Reports are compiled and forwarded to appropriate personnel
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
19
Range Of Variables PLAN AND MANAGE STORAGE OF DANGEROUS GOODS AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgement for self and others in planning and
using resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource co-ordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the bulk handling,
dangerous goods and freight forwarding sections of the warehousing, storage, transport and distribution industries
b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Work may involve exposure to corrosive chemicals, solvents and adhesives, carcinogenic and other harmful substances, movement of equipment, goods, and vehicular traffic
f. Regulatory controls and workplace procedures govern requirements for co-storage, volume, mass and required controls
g. Requirements for bulk handling and storage activities may include: g.1. types of bulk materials g.2. quantities g.3. handling requirements including any special equipment or operating
procedures required g.4. storage requirements g.5. stock control methods g.6. negating contaminant sources g.7. controlling pest infestation
h. Requirements for work may include: h.1. site restrictions and procedures h.2. use of safety and personal protection equipment h.3. communications equipment h.4. specialised lifting and/or handling equipment h.5. incident/accident breakdown procedures h.6. additional gear and equipment h.7. noise restrictions h.8. hours of operations h.9. authorities and permits
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
20
Range of Variables (continued) PLAN AND MANAGE STORAGE OF DANGEROUS GOODS AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Hazards may include: i.1. hazardous or dangerous materials i.2. contamination of, or from, materials being handled i.3. fire/explosions i.4. noise, light, energy sources i.5. stationary and moving machinery, parts or components i.6. radioactive goods i.7. dust/vapours i.8. service lines i.9. spills, leakages, ruptures
j. Hazard management is consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before safe working practices and personal protective equipment
k. Consultative processes may involve: k.1. other employees and supervisors k.2. suppliers, potential customers and existing clients k.3. relevant authorities and institutions k.4. government instrumentalities and k.5. emergency services k.6. management and union representatives k.7. industrial relations and OHS specialists k.8. other maintenance, professional or technical staff
l. Communication in the work area may include: l.1. phone l.2. electronic data interchange (EDI) l.3. fax l.4. e-mail l.5. Internet l.6. RF communications l.7. barcode readers l.8. oral, aural or signed communications
m. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: m.1. company procedures m.2. enterprise procedures m.3. organisational procedures m.4. established procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
21
Range of Variables (continued) PLAN AND MANAGE STORAGE OF DANGEROUS GOODS AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES VARIABLE SCOPE
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Information/documentation may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
bulk handling and storage. a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including the ADG Code
a.3. workplace operating procedures and policies a.4. supplier and/or client instructions a.5. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.6. manufacturer’s specifications and/or supplier's handling and storage
advice a.7. material safety data sheets a.8. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of load
shifting equipment and storage facilities a.9. Australian and International standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.10. communications technology equipment, oral, aural or signed
communications a.11. quality assurance standards and procedures a.12. emergency procedures a.13. relevant competency standards and training materials a.14. QA plans, data and document control a.15. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. relevant codes and regulations for bulk handling and storage a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including: a.2.1. Australian and International Dangerous Goods Codes a.2.2. Australian and International Explosives Codes
a.3. relevant Australian and international standards and certification requirements, including AS 1216, AS 1596, AS 1894, AS 1940, AS 2030.1-4, AS 2508.2.001-013, AS 2508.3.001-014
a.4. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation in terms of duties of employers, employees, suppliers and contractors
a.5. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.6. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.7. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.8. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
22
Evidence Guide PLAN AND MANAGE STORAGE OF DANGEROUS GOODS AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES 1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. plan and assess options for the safe and efficient storage of dangerous
goods and hazardous substances to regulatory requirements as a minimum
a.2. identify container markings and HAZCHEM codes a.3. undertake a hazard analysis a.4. estimate weight and volume of goods to be stored and any special
requirements a.5. select appropriate equipment and work systems a.6. communicate in writing and respond to telephone and verbal inquiries a.7. identify potential hazards and plan work to minimise risks when
transferring and storing the goods a.8. determine (any) required permits/licensing a.9. use appropriate communication strategies and equipment a.10. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.11. maintain enterprise records and documentation a.12. identify and safely handle equipment and goods a.13. apply the hierarchy of hazard control
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job role or function.
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international regulations relevant to bulk handling and storage
b. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the handling and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace procedures for the planning and management of the storage of
dangerous goods and hazardous substances d. Problems that may occur during the planning and management of the
storage of dangerous goods and hazardous substances and action that can be taken to resolve or report the problems
e. Risks and hazards related to the storage of dangerous goods and hazardous substances and ways of controlling the risks involved
f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: f.1. focus of operation of work systems, resources, management and
workplace operating systems f.2. equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and
control mechanisms f.3. relevant permit and licence requirements f.4. application of relevant Australian Standards f.5. operational procedures for safe transfer and storage of dangerous goods
and hazardous materials f.6. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.7. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
23
Evidence Guide (continued) PLAN AND MANAGE STORAGE OF DANGEROUS GOODS AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES 3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
f.8. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share knowledge and skills
f.9. relevant workplace documentation procedures g. Ability to:
g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to activities g.2. read and interpret technical data, drawings, instructions and manuals g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the planning and
management of the storage of dangerous goods and hazardous substances
g.4. provide leadership to others g.5. plan and organise activities g.6. select and apply appropriate application of technology, information
systems and procedures g.7. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to plan and manage the storage of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, and/or
a.2. plan and manage the storage of dangerous goods and hazardous substances in an appropriate range of operational warehousing, storage, transport and distribution contexts
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. planning and assessing options for the safe and efficient storage of dangerous goods and hazardous substances to regulatory requirements
a.2. identifying container markings and HAZCHEM codes a.3. undertaking a hazard analysis a.4. estimating weight and volume of goods to be stored and any special
requirements a.5. identifying potential hazards and planning work to minimise risks when
transferring and storing the goods a.6. determining (any) required permits/licensing a.7. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information a.8. maintaining enterprise records and documentation
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements
including local and international regulations pertaining to the storage of dangerous goods and hazardous substances
b.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the handling, storage and transport of dangerous goods, explosives and hazardous substances
b.3. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.4. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures)
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
24
Evidence Guide (continued) PLAN AND MANAGE STORAGE OF DANGEROUS GOODS AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES 5. Consistency in
performance c. When allocating tasks consistently considers competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 2 2 3 2
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
25
TDTA3401A MANAGE GLOBAL FREIGHT OPERATIONS Field A Handling Cargo/Stock DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to plan and manage global freight operations in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures, including the ADG and IDG codes. This includes analysing freight transfer requirements, planning and establishing processes for global freight operations, monitoring and coordinating systems and processes for global freight operations, and completing all required documentation.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Analyse global freight operations requirements
a. Australian and international codes and regulations and workplace policies for global freight operations are identified
b. Information on current and potential customers and their freight requirements are obtained and analysed in accordance with workplace procedures
c. Special characteristics and customer requirements for the types of freight to be transferred are identified, interpreted and considered in accordance with workplace procedures
d. Appropriate options for global freight operations are evaluated in terms of identified special requirements, customer needs and relevant regulatory requirements including Australian and international codes for the transport, handling and storage of dangerous goods and hazardous materials
e. Selected options for freight transfer arrangements are documented in accordance with workplace policy and related regulations
2. Plan systems and
processes for global freight operations
a. Workplace policies and mission statement are interpreted to define the process requirements for global freight operations
b. Appropriate systems are evaluated and established/coordinated to facilitate the organisation of global freight operations including suitable risk analysis
c. Human resources needed to organise global freight operations are identified and documented
d. Action is initiated to ensure staff are assigned, recruited and/or trained in accordance with identified human resource requirements
e. Office, computer and communications equipment is identified and action initiated for appropriate assignment or procurement
f. Quality standards and procedures for proposed global freight operations processes are documented/updated in accordance with workplace procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
26
3. Monitor and coordinate systems and processes for global freight operations
a. International freight forwarding operations are monitored against identified quality standards and compliance with Australian and international regulatory requirements
b. Non-compliance with quality standards or regulatory requirements is identified and appropriate action is initiated to report and rectify any identified problems
c. Customer satisfaction with global freight operations is monitored using appropriate methods
d. Customer concerns and suggestions for service improvements are acted upon in accordance with workplace procedures
e. Reports and other required documentation related to global freight operations are completed and referred to relevant personnel in accordance with workplace procedures
f. Any changes in Australian and international regulations and codes of practice relevant to global freight operations are monitored, identified and appropriate action initiated to ensure ongoing compliance of workplace processes and systems
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
27
Range Of Variables
MANAGE GLOBAL FREIGHT OPERATIONS
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant Australian and international regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG and IDG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the bulk handling,
dangerous goods and freight forwarding sections of the warehousing, storage, transport and distribution industries
b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Work systems may include: e.1. freight forwarding protocols and procedures e.2. communications equipment e.3. workplace operations e.4. authorities and permits e.5. hours of operation e.6. relevant regulations
f. Information needed to manage global freight operations may include: f.1. type, capacity and compatibility of cargo f.2. agreed delivery times and routing schedules f.3. pick-up and drop-off points f.4. specified carrier/mode of transport f.5. agreed cost structure
g. Forms of transport may include: g.1. road g.2. rail g.3. sea g.4. air g.5. local courier
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
28
Range of Variables (continued)
MANAGE GLOBAL FREIGHT OPERATIONS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
h. Consultative processes may involve: h.1. employees, supervisors and managers h.2. international and domestic agents, suppliers and current or potential
clients h.3. relevant authorities, government departments and institutions h.4. representatives of other enterprises and organisations related to global
freight operations h.5. industrial relations and OHS specialists h.6. other professional or technical staff
i. Communications systems may involve: i.1. telephone i.2. fax i.3. email i.4. electronic data transfer of information i.5. mail
j. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: j.1. company procedures j.2. enterprise procedures j.3. organisational procedures j.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
global freight operations a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including the ADG and IDG Code
a.3. workplace operating procedures and policies a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of transport
options a.6. supplier and/or client instructions a.7. Australian and international standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.8. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications a.9. quality assurance standards and procedures a.10. emergency procedures a.11. relevant competency standards and training materials a.12. QA plans, data and document control a.13. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
29
Range of Variables (continued)
MANAGE GLOBAL FREIGHT OPERATIONS
VARIABLE SCOPE
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice related to global freight operations a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling and transfer of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including: a.2.1. Australian and International Dangerous Goods Codes a.2.2. Australian Marine Orders and the International Maritime
Dangerous Goods Code a.2.3. IATA's 'Dangerous Goods by Air' regulations a.2.4. Australian and International Explosives Codes
a.3. relevant regulations for the import and export of cargo a.4. Australian and international standards and certification requirements a.5. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.6. relevant State/Territory environmental protection legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
30
Evidence Guide
MANAGE GLOBAL FREIGHT OPERATIONS
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. analyse freight transfer requirements a.2. plan systems and processes for global freight operations a.3. monitor systems and processes for global freight operations a.4. liaise with others using appropriate technology a.5. identify and plan systems to minimise risks a.6. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.7. maintain customer service and quality standards a.8. maintain workplace records and documentation a.9. communicate effectively with customers, staff and others
2. Interdependent
assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant Australian and international regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international freight regulations
b. Relevant OHS and environmental procedures and regulations c. Procedures followed in the management of global freight operations, including:
c.1. identification and interpretation of requirements of current and potential clients
c.2. identification and evaluation of information needed to manage global freight operations
c.3. reviewing system options for global freight operations including appropriate risk analysis
c.4. liaising with relevant Australian and international contacts using appropriate technology
c.5. establishing and/or monitoring suitable systems for global freight operations
d. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: d.1. focus of operation of work systems, resources, management and
workplace operating systems d.2. relative features and risks of various modes of transport storage and
freight transfer, their applications and processes, and issues involved in their use
d.3. contacts and sources of information/documentation needed when managing systems for global freight operations
d.4. quality and customer service standards, policies and procedures d.5. relevant permit and licence requirements d.6. application of relevant Australian and international standards and
associated certification requirements d.7. operational requirements for the safe transfer and storage of dangerous
goods and hazardous materials d.8. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group d.9. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity d.10. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills d.11. relevant workplace documentation procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
31
Evidence Guide (continued)
MANAGE GLOBAL FREIGHT OPERATIONS
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
e. Ability to: e.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to workplace
activities e.2. read and interpret operational data, instructions and manuals e.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the management of
global freight operations e.4. provide leadership to others e.5. plan and organise systems and activities e.6. select and use appropriate application of technology, information
systems and procedures e.7. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to manage global freight operations, and/or
a.2. manage global freight operations in an appropriate range of operational contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. analysing requirements for global freight operations a.2. planning systems and processes for global freight operations a.3. monitoring systems and processes for global freight operations a.4. identifying and planning systems to minimise risks a.5. maintaining quality and customer service standards a.6. communicating effectively with customers, staff and others, using
appropriate technology and methods b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including:
b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international freight regulations
b.2. OHS policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including security and
housekeeping procedures) b.4. issue resolution procedures b.5. standards and guidelines relating to the safe use of vehicles, machinery
and equipment b.6. environmental protection procedures
c. When allocating tasks consistently considers competency requirements, size of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
32
Evidence Guide (continued)
MANAGE GLOBAL FREIGHT OPERATIONS
6. Context for
assessment a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training
Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
33
TDTA3501A MANAGE INTERNATIONAL FREIGHT TRANSFER Field A Handling Cargo/Stock DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to plan and manage international freight transfer in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures, including the ADG and IDG codes. This includes analysing freight transfer requirements, planning and establishing processes for international freight transfer, monitoring and coordinating systems and processes for international freight transfer, and completing all required documentation.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Analyse freight transfer requirements
a. Australian and international codes and regulations and workplace policies for international freight transfer are identified
b. Information on current and potential customers and their international freight requirements are obtained and analysed in accordance with workplace procedures
c. Special characteristics and customer requirements for the types of freight to be transferred are identified, interpreted and considered in accordance with workplace procedures
d. Appropriate options for international freight transfer are evaluated in terms of identified special requirements, customer needs and relevant regulatory requirements including Australian and international codes for the transfer of dangerous goods and hazardous materials
e. Selected options for freight transfer arrangements are documented in accordance with workplace policy and related regulations
2. Plan systems and
processes for international freight transfer
a. Workplace policies and mission statement are interpreted to define the process requirements for international freight transfer
b. Appropriate systems are evaluated and established/coordinated to facilitate the organisation of international freight transfer including suitable risk analysis
c. Human resources needed to organise international freight transfer are identified and documented
d. Action is initiated to ensure staff are assigned, recruited and/or trained in accordance with identified human resource requirements
e. Office, computer and communications equipment is identified and action initiated for appropriate assignment or procurements
f. Quality standards and procedures for proposed international freight transfer processes are documented/updated in accordance with workplace procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
34
3. Monitor and coordinate systems and processes for international freight transfer
a. International freight forwarding operations are monitored against identified quality standards and compliance with Australian and international regulatory requirements
b. Non-compliance with quality standards or regulatory requirements is identified and appropriate action is initiated to report and rectify any identified problems
c. Customer satisfaction with international freight transfer services is monitored using appropriate methods
d. Customer concerns and suggestions for service improvements are acted upon in accordance with workplace procedures
e. Reports and other required documentation related to international freight transfer operations are completed and referred to relevant personnel in accordance with workplace procedures
f. Any changes in Australian and international regulations and codes of practice relevant to international freight transfer are monitored, identified and appropriate action initiated to ensure ongoing compliance of workplace processes and systems
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
35
Range Of Variables
MANAGE INTERNATIONAL FREIGHT TRANSFER
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant Australian and international regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG and IDG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the bulk handling,
dangerous goods and freight forwarding sections of the warehousing, storage, transport and distribution industries
b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Work systems may include: e.1. freight forwarding protocols and procedures e.2. communications equipment e.3. workplace operations e.4. authorities and permits e.5. hours of operation e.6. relevant regulations
f. Information needed to organise the international transport of freight may include: f.1. type, capacity and compatibility of cargo f.2. agreed delivery times and routing schedules f.3. pick-up and drop-off points f.4. specified carrier/mode of transport f.5. agreed cost structure
g. Forms of transport may include: g.1. road g.2. rail g.3. sea g.4. air g.5. local courier
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
36
Range of Variables (continued)
MANAGE INTERNATIONAL FREIGHT TRANSFER
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
h. Consultative processes may involve: h.1. employees, supervisors and managers h.2. international and domestic agents, suppliers and current or potential
clients h.3. relevant authorities, government departments and institutions h.4. representatives of other enterprises and organisations related to the
international transfer of freight h.5. industrial relations and OHS specialists h.6. other professional or technical staff
i. Communications systems may involve: i.1. telephone i.2. fax i.3. email i.4. electronic data transfer of information i.5. mail
j. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: j.1. company procedures j.2. enterprise procedures j.3. organisational procedures j.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
the international transfer of freight a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including the ADG and IDG Code
a.3. workplace operating procedures and policies a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of transport
options a.6. supplier and/or client instructions a.7. Australian and International standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.8. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications a.9. quality assurance standards and procedures a.10. emergency procedures a.11. relevant competency standards and training materials a.12. QA plans, data and document control a.13. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
37
Range of Variables (continued)
MANAGE INTERNATIONAL FREIGHT TRANSFER
VARIABLE SCOPE
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice for the international transfer of freight a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling and transfer of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including: a.2.1. Australian and International Dangerous Goods Codes a.2.2. Australian Marine Orders and the International Maritime
Dangerous Goods Code a.2.3. IATA's 'Dangerous Goods by Air' regulations a.2.4. Australian and International Explosives Codes
a.3. relevant regulations for the import and export of cargo a.4. Australian and international standards and certification requirements a.5. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.6. relevant State/Territory environmental protection legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
38
Evidence Guide
MANAGE INTERNATIONAL FREIGHT TRANSFER
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. analyse freight transfer requirements a.2. plan systems and processes for international freight transfer a.3. monitor systems and processes for international freight transfer a.4. liaise with others using appropriate technology a.5. identify and plan systems to minimise risks a.6. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.7. maintain workplace records and documentation a.8. communicate effectively with customers, staff and others
2. Interdependent
assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant Australian and international regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international freight regulations
b. Relevant OHS and environmental procedures and regulations c. Procedures followed in the management of the international transfer of freight,
including: c.1. identification and interpretation of requirements of current and potential
clients c.2. identification and evaluation of information needed to manage the
international transfer of freight c.3. reviewing options for international freight transfer systems c.4. liaising with relevant Australian and international contacts using
appropriate technology c.5. establishing and monitoring suitable international freight transfer
operations d. Operational knowledge and understanding may include:
d.1. focus of operation of work systems, resources, management and workplace operating systems
d.2. contacts and sources of information/documentation needed when managing systems for the international transfer of freight
d.3. quality and customer service policies and procedures d.4. relevant permit and licence requirements d.5. application of relevant Australian Standards and associated certification
requirements d.6. operational requirements for the safe transfer and storage of dangerous
goods and hazardous materials d.7. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group d.8. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity d.9. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills d.10. relevant workplace documentation procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
39
Evidence Guide (continued)
MANAGE INTERNATIONAL FREIGHT TRANSFER
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
e. Ability to: e.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to workplace
activities e.2. read and interpret operational data, instructions and manuals e.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the management of
international freight transfer operations e.4. provide leadership to others e.5. plan and organise systems and activities e.6. select and apply appropriate application of technology, information
systems and procedures a.7. maintain workplace records and documentation e.8. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to manage international freight transfer, and/or
a.2. manage international freight transfer in an appropriate range of operational transport, warehousing, storage and distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. analysing freight transfer requirements a.2. planning systems and processes for international freight transfer a.3. monitoring systems and processes for international freight transfer a.4. identifying and planning systems to minimise risks a.5. maintaining workplace records and documentation a.6. communicating effectively with customers, staff and others, using
appropriate technology and methods b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including:
b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international freight regulations
b.2. OHS policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including security and
housekeeping procedures) b.4. issue resolution procedures b.5. standards and guidelines relating to the safe use of vehicles, machinery
and equipment b.6. environmental protection procedures
c. When allocating tasks consistently considers competency requirements, size of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified incidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
40
Evidence Guide (continued)
MANAGE INTERNATIONAL FREIGHT TRANSFER
5. Consistency in
performance (continued)
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
41
TDTA3601A MANAGE HANDLING AND STORAGE OF PERISHABLE FOOD PRODUCTS
Field A Handling Cargo/Stock DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to manage handling and storage of perishable food products, including defining objectives of required handling and storage operation; specifying equipment and system performance requirements; evaluating and selecting resources for handling and storage of perishable food products; and completing documentation.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Define objectives of required handling and storage operation
a. Requirements for handling and storage of perishable food products are identified in accordance with workplace requirements
b. Current best practice and future trends for handling and storage equipment are assessed and compared to present operations
c. Consideration of workplace goals and present capabilities and constraints is undertaken in selecting resources for handling and storage of perishable food products
2. Specify equipment and system performance requirements
a. Equipment and system requirements for handling and storage of perishable food products are documented
b. Performance measures for equipment and system operations are developed and documented
c. Consultations are conducted with relevant employees and management to verify documented requirements
3. Evaluate and
select resources for handling and storage of perishable food products
a. The range of equipment and facilities for handling and storage of perishable food products which meet specifications are researched for costs and benefits including potential adaptability for new business opportunities
b. A rating system is instigated to facilitate comparisons of cost/benefit and other qualitative properties of equipment and systems
c. An analysis of current employee competency to required competency is undertaken and documented
d. Equipment is selected based on comparisons of performance specifications including cost, output, set-up requirements, maintenance and retraining
4. Complete
documentation a. Workplace documentation is completed as appropriate b. Handling and storage requirements are documented and communicated to
relevant personnel c. Reports are compiled and forwarded to appropriate personnel
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
42
Range Of Variables
MANAGE HANDLING AND STORAGE OF PERISHABLE FOOD PRODUCTS
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the sections of the
warehousing, storage, transport and distribution industries involved in the handling and storage of perishable food products
b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Work may involve exposure to chilled and controlled environments, movement of equipment, goods, and vehicular traffic
f. Regulatory controls and workplace procedures govern requirements for co-storage, volume, mass and required controls
g. Requirements for handling and storage of perishable food product may include: g.1. types of perishable food products and related special requirements g.2. quantities g.3. systems for controlling temperature and other critical parameters g.4. handling requirements including any special equipment or operating
procedures required g.5. storage requirements g.6. stock control methods g.7. negating contaminant sources
h. Hazards may include: h.1. cold environments h.2. confined spaces h.3. hazardous or dangerous materials h.4. contamination of, or from, materials being handled h.5. fire/explosions h.6. noise, light, energy sources h.7. stationary and moving machinery, parts or components
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
43
Range of Variables (continued)
MANAGE HANDLING AND STORAGE OF PERISHABLE FOOD PRODUCTS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Requirements for work may include: i.1. site restrictions and procedures i.2. use of safety and personal protection equipment i.3. systems and facilities for controlling storage environments i.4. specialised lifting and/or handling equipment i.5. incident/accident breakdown procedures i.6. additional gear and equipment i.7. noise restrictions i.8. hours of operations i.9. authorities and permits i.10. communications equipment
j. Hazard management is consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before safe working practices and personal protective equipment
k. Consultative processes may involve: k.1. other employees and supervisors k.2. suppliers, potential customers and existing clients k.3. relevant authorities and institutions k.4. government instrumentalities and k.5. emergency services k.6. management and union representatives k.7. industrial relations and OHS specialists k.8. other maintenance, professional or technical staff
l. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: l.1. company procedures l.2. enterprise procedures l.3. organisational procedures l.4. established procedures
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Information/documentation may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
the handling and storage of perishable food products. a.2. workplace operating procedures and policies a.3. supplier and/or client instructions a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. manufacturer’s specifications for equipment and environmental control
systems a.6. supplier's handling and storage advice a.7. material safety data sheets a.8. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of load
shifting equipment and storage facilities a.9. relevant Australian and international standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.10. communications technology equipment, oral, aural or signed
communications
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
44
Range of Variables (continued)
MANAGE HANDLING AND STORAGE OF PERISHABLE FOOD PRODUCTS
VARIABLE SCOPE
3. Sources of information/ documents
(continued)
a.11. quality assurance standards and procedures a.12. emergency procedures a.13. relevant competency standards and training materials a.14. QA plans, data and document control a.15. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. relevant codes and regulations for the handling and storage of perishable
food products a.2. relevant Australian and international standards and certification
requirements a.3. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation in
terms of duties of employers, employees, suppliers and contractors a.4. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.5. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.6. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.7. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
45
Evidence Guide
MANAGE HANDLING AND STORAGE OF PERISHABLE FOOD PRODUCTS
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. plan and assess options for the safe and efficient handling and storage
of perishable food products to regulatory requirements as a minimum a.2. identify container markings and HAZCHEM codes a.3. undertake a hazard and risk analysis a.4. estimate weight and volume of perishable food products to be stored
and special storage requirements a.5. select appropriate equipment, storage facilities and environment control
systems a.6. communicate in writing and respond to telephone and verbal inquiries a.7. identify potential hazards and plan work to minimise risks when
transferring and storing the goods a.8. determine (any) required permits/licensing a.9. use appropriate communication strategies and equipment a.10. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.11. maintain enterprise records and documentation a.12. identify and safely handle equipment and goods a.13. apply the hierarchy of hazard control
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job role or function
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international regulations relevant to the handling and storage of perishable food products
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace procedures for the planning and management of the handling and
storage of perishable food products d. Problems that may occur during the planning and management of the
handling and storage of perishable food products and action that can be taken to resolve or report the problems
e. Risks and hazards related to the handling and storage of perishable food products and ways of controlling the risks involved
f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: f.1. focus of operation of work systems, resources, management and
workplace operating systems f.2. equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and
control mechanisms f.3. relevant permit and licence requirements f.4. application of relevant Australian Standards f.5. operational procedures for safe transfer and storage of perishable food
products f.6. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.7. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.8. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills f.9. relevant workplace documentation procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
46
Evidence Guide (continued)
MANAGE HANDLING AND STORAGE OF PERISHABLE FOOD PRODUCTS
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g. Ability to: g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self in relation to activities g.2. read and interpret technical data, drawings, instructions and manuals g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the planning and
management of the handling and storage of perishable food products g.4. provide leadership to others g.5. plan and organise activities g.6. select and apply appropriate application of technology, information
systems and procedures g.7. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to manage the handling and storage of perishable food products, and/or
a.2. manage the handling and storage of perishable food products in an appropriate range of operational warehousing, storage, transport and distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. planning and assessing options for the safe and efficient handling and storage of perishable food products to regulatory requirements
a.2. identifying container markings and manifest information a.3. undertaking a hazard and risk analysis a.4. estimating weight and volume of perishable food products to be stored
and special storage requirements a.5. identifying potential hazards and planning work to minimise risks when
transferring and storing perishable food products a.6. determining (any) required permits/licensing a.7. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information a.8. maintaining enterprise records and documentation
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements
including local and international codes and regulations pertaining to the handling and storage of perishable food products
b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures)
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
47
Evidence Guide (continued)
MANAGE HANDLING AND STORAGE OF PERISHABLE FOOD PRODUCTS
5. Consistency in
performance c. When allocating tasks consistently considers competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 2 3 3
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
48
TDTB1098B PLAN AND IMPLEMENT MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Field B Equipment Checking and Maintenance DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to plan and implement maintenance schedules in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures. This includes establishing maintenance requirements, organising maintenance activities, organising resources, and completing all required procedures and documentation.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Establish maintenance requirements
a. Equipment specifications, service requirements and workplace procedures are checked for recommended maintenance intervals and processes
b. Special requirements for maintenance of storage zones are identified c. Comparisons with previous experience, future equipment use, work
requirements and standard operating procedures are made to inform the planning process
d. Work plan and work schedule are developed e. Contractors and/or maintenance providers (internal/external) are identified f. Costings for process are identified based on work schedule (equipment/staff
off-line), equipment manufacturers’ recommendations, charges for materials, equipment and consumables and external/internal labor charges
g. Required interruptions, processes and procedures are documented and recorded
h. Clearances for any required costs for maintenance are obtained
2 Organise maintenance activities
a. Work schedules and staff rosters are checked to identify times when the maintenance process may be scheduled including optimum timing for any shut down
b. Permission from supervisory personnel is obtained for timing of maintenance to optimise the maintenance process and work
c. Detailed work plans are developed to accord with work schedules, availability of expertise and the resource availability
d. Employees with the required competencies are identified and where necessary appropriate training and assessment is facilitated
e. Approvals for work schedule, employee work pattern and maintenance schedule adjustments are obtained and work plan is refined to ensure the maintenance program will maintain workplace outputs in terms of workplace policy
3. Organise
resources a. Required equipment, personnel and consumables are allocated in accordance
with workplace procedures b. Consumables, equipment and expertise are located and coordinated to meet
maintenance work schedule c. Externally sourced equipment, consumables and expertise are identified and
appropriate arrangements made for procurement
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
49
4. Complete maintenance procedures
a. Completed work is checked against the maintenance schedule and the work plan
b. Records of work are completed and forwarded to appropriate personnel noting areas where additional maintenance is required to maintain optimum work output and equipment life
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
50
Range Of Variables
PLAN AND IMPLEMENT MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be carried out in compliance with the relevant Australian regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource co-ordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the Warehousing,
Storage, Transport and Distribution Industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty four hour operation d.2. single and multi site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Work systems may include: e.1. preventative and remedial maintenance schedules, protocols and
procedures e.2. faulty equipment tagging and repair/replacement systems e.3. equipment inventory and identification systems e.4. communications equipment e.5. workplace operations e.6. authorities and permits e.7. hours of operation e.8. relevant regulations
f. Consultative processes may involve: f.1. employees, supervisors and managers f.2. equipment manufacturers and suppliers f.3. contractors f.4. industrial relations and OHS specialists f.5. other professional or technical staff
g. Communications systems may involve: g.1. telephone g.2. fax g.3. email g.4. electronic data transfer of information g.5. mail
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
51
Range of Variables (continued)
PLAN AND IMPLEMENT MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
h. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: h.1. company procedures h.2. enterprise procedures h.3. organisational procedures h.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
equipment maintenance a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including the ADG Code
a.3. workplace operating procedures, maintenance schedules and policies a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of transport
options a.6. supplier and/or client instructions a.7. statistical information on equipment malfunctions, maintenance and
repairs a.8. relevant Australian Standards, criteria and certification requirements a.9. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications a.10. quality assurance and customer service standards and procedures a.11. emergency procedures a.12. relevant competency standards and training materials a.13. QA plans, data and document control a.14. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable regulations and legislation may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice related to equipment maintenance a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage and transfer of dangerous goods and hazardous substances
a.3. relevant Australian and international standards and certification requirements
a.4. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.5. relevant State/Territory environmental protection legislation a.6. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.7. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.8. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.9. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative
Action legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
52
Evidence Guide
PLAN AND IMPLEMENT MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. plan and implement maintenance schedules to integrate effectively and
efficiently within the workplace a.2. apply leadership skills to the completion of maintenance schedules
including the allocation and delegation of tasks, resource procurement and assembly
a.3. manage own work to achieve workplace goals and required results a.4. suggest improvements to housekeeping and zone workplace operations
and negotiate changes a.5. identify requirements of tasks and organise planning, job completion and
evaluation of outcomes a.6. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.7. provide customer/client service and work effectively with others
2. Interdependent
assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant Australian and international regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international freight regulations
b. Relevant OHS and environmental procedures and regulations c. Procedures followed in the management of global freight operations, including:
c.1. identification and interpretation of maintenance requirements c.2. identification and evaluation of information needed to plan and
implement maintenance schedules c.3. reviewing system options for maintenance operations including
appropriate risk analysis c.4. procedures for liaising with manufacturers and suppliers c.5. procedures establishing and/or monitoring suitable maintenance
systems d. Operational knowledge and understanding may include:
d.1. focus of operation of maintenance systems, resources, management and workplace operating systems
d.2. characteristics and capabilities of equipment, materials and processes used
d.3. relative features and risks of various maintenance systems, their applications and processes, and issues involved in their use
d.4. quality and customer service standards, policies and procedures d.5. application of relevant Australian and International Standards and
associated certification requirements d.6. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group d.7. understanding and knowledge of the application of current
competencies within functional activity d.8. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills d.9. relevant workplace documentation procedures d.10. contacts and sources of information/documentation needed when
planning and implementing maintenance systems
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
53
Evidence Guide (continued)
PLAN AND IMPLEMENT MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
e. Ability to: e.1. manage and prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to
workplace activities e.2. read and interpret operational and technical data, instructions and
manuals e.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the planning and
implementation of maintenance schedules e.4. identify the factors in work schedules, time and resource requirements
(including sourcing expertise external to the work team) when scheduling the maintenance process
e.5. suggest improvements to housekeeping and zone workplace operations and negotiate changes
e.6. provide leadership to others e.7. provide customer/client service e.8. plan and organise systems and activities e.9. select and apply appropriate application of technology, information
systems and procedures e.10. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to plan and implement maintenance schedules, and/or
a.2. plan and implement maintenance schedules in an appropriate range of operational contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies knowledge and skills when:
a.1. planning and implementing maintenance schedules to integrate effectively and efficiently within the workplace
a.2. applying leadership skills to the completion of maintenance schedules including the allocation and delegation of tasks, resource procurement and assembly
a.3. suggesting improvements to housekeeping and zone workplace operations and negotiating changes
a.4. identifying requirements of tasks and organising planning, job completion and evaluation of outcomes
a.5. providing customer/client service and working effectively with others b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including:
b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international freight regulations
b.2. OHS policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions, (including security and
housekeeping procedures) b.4. issue resolution procedures b.5. standards and guidelines relating to the safe use of vehicles, machinery
and equipment b.6. environmental protection procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
54
Evidence Guide (continued)
PLAN AND IMPLEMENT MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
5. Consistency in
performance (continued)
c. When allocating tasks consistently considers, competency requirements, size of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 2 3 2
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
55
TDTD2598B PLAN LOADING OF DANGEROUS GOODS Field D Load Handling DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to plan loading of dangerous goods in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures, including assessing the goods/freight to be loaded, planning the transfer and loading operations, and completing all required documentation. Persons achieving competence in this unit will need to fulfil all of the relevant State/Territory regulations and codes concerning the carriage of explosives and dangerous goods.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Assess goods/freight to be loaded
a. Classification of goods/freight shipping documentation is assessed for compliance to the goods being loaded and for compliance with the Australian Dangerous Goods Code
b. The degree of risk for transported dangerous good(s) is determined in accordance with the Australian Dangerous Goods Code
c. Where applicable, compatibility of dangerous goods is assessed and segregation and storage requirements planned in accordance with legislative and workplace requirements
d. Dangerous goods are assessed for compatibility and safe transport with intended packaging configuration/container
e. Marking and placarding of loads is determined in accordance with legislative requirements
2. Plan
transfer/loading operations
a. Dangerous goods transfer/loading operations are determined in accordance with workplace procedures, the ADG Code and relevant regulatory requirements
b. Plans for the transfer/loading operations are communicated to relevant personnel
3. Document
procedures a. Dangerous goods loading procedures are documented in a form and manner
appropriate for those employees undertaking the task and to meet regulatory requirements including completion of dangerous goods declarations
b. Shipping documentation/markings/placarding is planned and coordinated to ensure appropriate documentation variations in load deliveries and pick-ups
c. Drivers/operators and dangerous goods licences and insurance requirements are checked in relation to load
d. Procedures and copies of dangerous goods declarations are filed and/or located in accordance with workplace procedures and regulatory requirements
4. Review planning
process a. Planning processes are reviewed/refined in accordance with operational
feedback b. Annotations/changes to procedures are undertaken in accordance with
legislative and workplace requirements
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
56
Range Of Variables
PLAN LOADING OF DANGEROUS GOODS
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be carried out in compliance with the relevant Australian regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the warehousing,
storage, transport and distribution industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Plans for dangerous goods transfer/loading operations may encompass consideration of: e.1. approved transfer site e.2. positioning of vehicle e.3. safe operating procedures e.4. specification of required personal protection and emergency equipment e.5. specification of required transfer equipment/assemblies e.6. permitted ullage and filling ratios and/or carrying capacities e.7. segregation and/or storage requirements e.8. emergency/incident procedures e.9. customer requirements
f. Goods/cargo to be loaded and unloaded may require special precautions for handling and stacking
g. Classes of dangerous goods are as defined in the respective Australian Codes h. Standard placarding, marking and signage for identified dangerous goods are
as required in the respective Australian Codes, including HAZCHEM codes
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
57
Range of Variables (continued)
PLAN LOADING OF DANGEROUS GOODS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Hazards may include: i.1. hazardous or dangerous materials i.2. contamination of, or from, materials being handled i.3. noise, light, energy sources i.4. stationary and moving machinery, parts or components i.5. service lines i.6. spill, leakages, ruptures i.7. dust/vapours
j. Hazard management is consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before safe working practices and personal protective equipment
k. Requirements for work may include: k.1. site restrictions and procedures k.2. use of safety and personal protection equipment k.3. communications equipment k.4. specialised lifting and/or handling equipment k.5. incident/accident breakdown procedures k.6. additional gear and equipment k.7. noise restrictions k.8. hours of operation k.9. authorities and permits
l. Consultative processes may involve: l.1. employees, supervisors and managers l.2. equipment manufacturers and suppliers l.3. contractors l.4. industrial relations and OHS specialists l.5. other professional or technical staff
m. Communications systems may involve: m.1. telephone m.2. fax m.3. email m.4. electronic data transfer of information m.5. mail
n. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: n.1. company procedures n.2. enterprise procedures n.3. organisational procedures n.4. established procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
58
Range of Variables (continued)
PLAN LOADING OF DANGEROUS GOODS
VARIABLE SCOPE
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including the ADG Code
a.2. goods identification numbers and codes, including ADG and IMDG markings and HAZCHEM signs
a.3. relevant codes of practice, including the Australian Dangerous Goods Code, the Australian Explosives Code, the Industry Safety Code, and National Standards for Manual Handling
a.4. manifests, bar codes, goods and container identification/serial number a.5. manufacturer’s specifications, instructions and labelling advice including
material safety data sheets a.6. workplace operating procedures, maintenance schedules and policies a.7. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.8. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of transport
options a.9. supplier and/or client instructions a.10. relevant Australian Standards, criteria and certification requirements a.11. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications a.12. quality assurance and customer service standards and procedures a.13. emergency procedures a.14. relevant competency standards and training materials a.15. QA plans, data and document control a.16. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice related to loading/unloading of goods
and manual handling including relevant road rules and mass and loading regulations
a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the handling and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including: a.2.1. Australian and International Dangerous Goods Codes a.2.2. Australian Marine Orders and the International Maritime
Dangerous Goods Code a.2.3. IATA's 'Dangerous Goods by Air' regulations a.2.4. Australian and International Explosives Codes
a.3. relevant Australian Standards such as: AS 1216, AS 1596, AS 1894, AS 1940, AS 2030.1-4, AS 2508.2.001-013, AS 2508.3.001-014
a.4. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.5. relevant State/Territory environmental protection legislation a.6. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.7. relevant workplace relations legislation a.8. relevant workers compensation legislation a.9. equal opportunity, equal employment opportunity and affirmative action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
59
Evidence Guide
PLAN LOADING OF DANGEROUS GOODS
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. assess and plan for the transfer/loading of dangerous goods a.2. estimate weight and dimensions of load and any special requirements a.3. select appropriate equipment and work systems a.4. identify job and site hazards and plan work to minimise risks a.5. determine (any) required permits and compliance with relevant
regulations/codes of practice a.6. use appropriate communication strategies and equipment a.7. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.8. maintain enterprise records and documentation
2. Interdependent
assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job.
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant regulations and codes concerning the handling, loading and transport of goods and freight
b. Relevant aspects of ADG Code and relevant Australian Standards applicable to dangerous goods and hazardous substances
c. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations d. Workplace procedures for planning the loading/transferring of dangerous
goods and hazardous substances e. Problems that may occur during the loading/transferring of dangerous goods
and hazardous substances and action that can be taken to report or resolve the problems
f. Hazards that may exist during the loading/transferring of dangerous goods and hazardous substances and ways of controlling the risks involved
g. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: g.1. focus of operation of maintenance systems, resources, management
and workplace operating systems g.2. equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and
control g.3. permit and licence requirements g.4. quality and customer service standards, policies and procedures g.5. application of relevant Australian and international Standards and
associated certification requirements g.6. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group g.7. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity g.8. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills g.9. relevant workplace documentation procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
60
Evidence Guide (continued)
PLAN LOADING OF DANGEROUS GOODS
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
h. Ability to: h.1. manage and prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to
workplace activities h.2. read and interpret operational and technical data, instructions and
manuals h.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the planning of the
loading of dangerous goods h.4. identify the factors in work schedules, time and resource requirements
(including sourcing expertise external to the work team) when planning the loading of dangerous goods
h.5. suggest improvements to housekeeping and workplace operations and negotiate changes
h.6. provide leadership to others h.7. provide customer/client service h.8. plan and organise systems and activities h.9. select and apply appropriate application of technology, information
systems and procedures h.10. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to plan the loading of dangerous goods, and/or
a.2. plan the loading of dangerous goods in an appropriate range of operational contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. assessing and planning for the transfer/loading of dangerous goods a.2. estimating weight and dimensions of load and any special requirements a.3. selecting appropriate equipment and work systems a.4. identifying job and site hazards and planning work to minimise risks a.5. determining (any) required permits and compliance with relevant
regulations/codes of practice b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including:
b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements including ADG Code and relevant regulations
b.2. OHS policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures) b.4. issue resolution procedures b.5. standards and guidelines relating to the safe use of vehicles, machinery
and equipment b.6. environmental protection procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
61
Evidence Guide (continued)
PLAN LOADING OF DANGEROUS GOODS
5. Consistency in
performance (continued)
c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks, competency requirements, size of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified safety incidents, accidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of competence must comply with the assessment requirements of the relevant State/Territory safeworking authority
b. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: b.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning b.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
b.2.1. at the Registered Training Organisation, and/or b.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 2 3 2
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
62
TDTD2698B PLAN AND ORGANISE MOVEMENT AND STORAGE OF BULK MATERIALS
Field D Load Handling DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to plan and organise movement and storage of bulk materials in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures, including analysing work requirements, scheduling work, organising transport and storage facilities, documenting and communicating decisions, and monitoring transportation and storage operations. Persons achieving competence in this unit will need to fulfil all of the relevant State/Territory regulations and codes concerning the movement and storage of dangerous goods.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Analyse work requirements
a. Requested consignment delivery and likely turnover rate is noted b. Consignment properties including mass, weight, dimensions and special
handling requirements are identified c. Risk classification and specific transport requirements for the security of the
consignment(s) are registered d. Required human and physical resources are identified and acquired in
accordance with work requirements and enterprise procedures e. Appropriate transport methods and storage requirements for the goods are
identified
2. Schedule work a. Delivery and pick-up schedule is compiled based on operational efficiency and customer requirements
b. Schedule is documented in accordance with enterprise procedures c. Route is established in accordance with pick-up and delivery schedule noting
potential obstacles and traffic conditions d. Stopping, loading and unloading points are identified and assessed for access,
operational requirements and customer nominated special requirements e. Risk management strategy, including development of a contingency action
plan, is documented
3. Organise transport and storage facilities
a. Appropriate storage facilities are selected based on volume and requirements for safe storage
b. Requirements for the receival and despatch of consignments are documented c. Communication and reporting procedures (including contact times) are
documented d. Operating procedures, including securing/monitoring of transfer areas,
requirements for travelling in public areas, check-in points and carrying/loading techniques are documented within the operational plan
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
63
4. Document and communicate decisions
a. Handling and storage requirements are documented b. Facilities, equipment and personnel are organised and scheduled c. Relevant parties are notified of decisions
5. Monitor transportation and storage operations
a. Customer(s) feedback is used to inform planning reviews b. Variation(s) to planned activities are communicated to employees involved in
the work
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
64
Range Of Variables
PLAN AND ORGANISE MOVEMENT AND STORAGE OF BULK MATERIALS
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgement for self and others in planning and
using resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the sections of the
warehousing, storage, transport and distribution industries involved in the movement and storage of bulk materials
b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Storage may be long or short term f. Transportation may be by air, road, rail or water g. Consultative processes may involve:
g.1. other employees and supervisors g.2. suppliers and customers g.3. relevant authorities and institutions g.4. government instrumentalities g.5. management g.6. union representatives g.7. industrial relations and OHS specialists g.8. other maintenance and professional or technical staff
h. Hazards may include: h.1. dust/vapours h.2. confined spaces h.3. hazardous or dangerous materials h.4. contamination of, or from, materials being handled h.5. fire/explosions h.6. noise, light, energy sources h.7. stationary and moving machinery, parts or components h.8. vehicular traffic
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
65
Range of Variables (continued)
PLAN AND ORGANISE MOVEMENT AND STORAGE OF BULK MATERIALS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Requirements for work may include: i.1. site restrictions and procedures i.2. use of safety and personal protection equipment i.3. systems and facilities for movement of bulk materials i.4. specialised lifting and/or handling equipment i.5. incident/accident breakdown procedures i.6. additional gear and equipment i.7. noise restrictions i.8. hours of operations i.9. authorities and permits i.10. communications equipment
j. Hazard management is consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before safe working practices and personal protective equipment
k. Communication in the work area may include: k.1. phone k.2. electronic data interchange (EDI) k.3. fax k.4. e-mail k.5. Internet k.6. RF communications k.7. bar code readers k.8. oral, aural or signed communications
l. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: l.1. company procedures l.2. enterprise procedures l.3. organisational procedures l.4. established procedures
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Information/documentation may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
the movement and storage of bulk materials. a.2. workplace operating procedures and policies a.3. supplier and/or client instructions a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. manufacturer’s specifications for equipment and environmental control
systems a.6. supplier's handling and storage advice a.7. material safety data sheets a.8. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of load
shifting equipment and bulk storage facilities a.9. relevant Australian and International standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.10. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
66
Range of Variables (continued)
PLAN AND ORGANISE MOVEMENT AND STORAGE OF BULK MATERIALS
VARIABLE SCOPE
3. Sources of information/ documents
(continued)
a.11. quality assurance standards and procedures a.12. emergency procedures a.13. relevant competency standards and training materials a.14. QA plans, data and document control a.15. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. relevant codes and regulations for the handling and storage of perishable
food products a.2. relevant Australian and international standards and certification
requirements a.3. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation in
terms of duties of employers, employees, suppliers and contractors a.4. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.5. relevant workplace relations legislation A.6. relevant workers compensation legislation a.7. equal opportunity, equal employment opportunity and affirmative action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
67
Evidence Guide
PLAN AND ORGANISE MOVEMENT AND STORAGE OF BULK MATERIALS
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. apply leadership skills to the completion of transportation, storage and
workplace projects a.2. assess transport and storage requirements of various bulk commodities a.3. schedule, coordinate and allocate resources to achieve bulk transport
and storage tasks a.4. suggest improvements to operations and negotiate changes a.5. resolve issues surrounding transportation and storage, maximising
positive outcomes for the workplace and the individuals within it a.6. monitor bulk movement and storage tasks a.7. provide customer/client service and work effectively with others a.8. apply the hierarchy of hazard control
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job role or function
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international regulations pertaining to the movement and storage of bulk materials
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace procedures for the planning and organisation of the movement and
storage of bulk materials d. Problems that may occur during planning and organisation of the movement
and storage of bulk materials and action that can be taken to resolve or report the problems
e. Risks and hazards related to the movement and storage of bulk materials and ways of controlling the risks involved
f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: f.1. focus of operation of transport and storage systems, resources,
management and workplace operating systems f.2. equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and
control mechanisms f.3. workplace business policies and plans including procedures for transport
and storage of freight and goods f.4. relevant permit and licence requirements f.5. application of relevant Australian standards f.6. operational procedures for safe movement and storage of bulk materials f.7. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.8. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.9. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills f.10. relevant workplace documentation procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
68
Evidence Guide (continued)
PLAN AND ORGANISE MOVEMENT AND STORAGE OF BULK MATERIALS
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g. Ability to: g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to activities g.2. read and interpret technical information, instructions and manuals g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the planning and
organisation of the movement and storage of bulk materials g.4. provide leadership to others g.5. plan and organise activities g.6. select and apply appropriate application of technology, information
systems and procedures g.7. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to plan and organise the movement and storage of bulk materials, and/or
a.2. plan and organise the movement and storage of bulk materials in an appropriate range of operational warehousing, storage, transport and distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. applying leadership skills to the completion of transportation, storage and workplace projects
a.2. assessing transport and storage requirements of various bulk commodities
a.3. scheduling, coordinating and allocating resources to achieve bulk transport and storage tasks
a.4. suggesting improvements to operations and negotiating changes a.5. resolving issues surrounding transportation and storage, maximising
positive outcomes for the workplace and the individuals within it a.6. monitoring bulk movement and storage tasks a.7. providing customer/client service and working effectively with others a.8. applying the hierarchy of hazard control
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements
including local and international codes and regulations pertaining to the movement and storage of bulk materials
b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures)
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
69
Evidence Guide (continued)
PLAN AND ORGANISE MOVEMENT AND STORAGE OF BULK MATERIALS
5. Consistency in
performance c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse and Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas and
Information
Plan and Organise Activities
Work with Others and in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas and Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
70
TDTF1701A INVESTIGATE RAIL SAFETY INCIDENTS Field F Occupational Health and Safety DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to investigate safety incidents in accordance with regulatory and workplace requirements, including planning the investigation, collecting and analysing information, and preparing the safety incident report. Persons achieving competence in this unit will need to fulfil the relevant requirements of the codes of practice and regulations of the States/Territories concerned, including the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network in situations where operations are carried out on that network.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Plan the investigation
a. Clarification of the objectives of the incident investigation is established in conjunction with relevant personnel, and in accordance with workplace and regulatory requirements
b. Timeframes and locations for the investigation are established in conjunction with relevant personnel
c. Resources required for the investigation are identified and obtained within workplace guidelines
2. Collect and
analyse information
a. All relevant available incident information is obtained and collated in order to facilitate a detailed and accurate analysis of the incident
b. Interviews are conducted with relevant personnel to establish their recollection of events associated with the incident
c. Information is analysed in accordance with the established objectives of the investigation, based on approved conditions, applicable standards and operational guidelines
d. Options for action are generated which are consistent with workplace and/or statutory requirements and lead to recommendations which reduce future risk
e. Criteria are specified to enable objective evaluation of the options to be undertaken
3. Prepare report a. Conclusions are drawn and recommendations are made which will enable a
satisfactory resolution of the incident issues, and meet workplace and any other statutory requirement.
b. Opportunities to enhance operational efficiency and safety procedures are documented in accordance with the standard reporting guidelines
c. Documentation is filed and distributed to all relevant parties for consideration and subsequent action
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
71
Range Of Variables
INVESTIGATE RAIL SAFETY INCIDENTS
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, codes of practice and workplace requirements concerning the investigation of safety incidents
b. Work is performed under some supervision generally within a team environment
c. Work involves the application of workplace procedures and relevant regulatory and code requirements to the investigation of safety incidents as part of work activities in the rail transport and/or allied industries
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be conducted in a range of work environments by day or night b. Customers may be internal or external c. Workplaces may comprise large, medium or small worksites d. Work may be conducted in:
d.1. limited or restricted spaces d.2. exposed conditions d.3. controlled or open environments
e. Resources required for the investigation may include: e.1. personnel time e.2. access to incident site d.3. access to equipment including rolling stock and infrastructure
f. Incident information may be obtained from: f.1. incident reports f.2. dangerous goods manifest f.3. driver's advice (train load) f.4. safeworking forms f.5. special train notices f.6. consist forms f.7. wagon cards f.8. out-of-gauge documents f.9. train journals or train register books transport instructions f.10. load and weight records f.11 material safety data sheets f.12. inspection reports-routine circulars f.13. interviews with those involved in the incident -f. f.14. interviews with witnesses
g. Depending on the context of the safety incident concerned, the applicable regulatory/code requirements may include: g.1. the relevant State/Territory OHS regulations g.2. the relevant State/Territory codes of practice for safeworking g.3. the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network
h. Hazards in the work area may include exposure to: h.1. chemicals h.2. dangerous or hazardous substances h.3. movements of equipment, goods, materials, trains and vehicular traffic
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
72
Range Of Variables (continued)
INVESTIGATE RAIL SAFETY INCIDENTS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Consultative processes may involve: i.1. other employees, supervisors and managers i.2. affected customers i.3. official representatives i.4. relevant authorities and institutions i.5. management and union representatives i.6. industrial relations and OHS specialists
j. Communication in the work area may include: j.1. phone j.2. electronic data interchange (EDI) j.3. fax j.4. e-mail j.5. Internet j.6. RF systems j.7. oral, aural or signed communications
k. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: k.1. company procedures k.2. enterprise procedures k.3. organisational procedures k.4. established procedures
l. Personal protection equipment may include: l.1. gloves l.2. safety headwear and footwear l.3. safety glasses l.4. two-way radios l.5. high visibility clothing
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Information/documents may include: a.1. relevant regulatory and/or code requirements for the investigation of
safety incidents a.2. workplace procedures and policies for the investigation of safety
incidents a.3. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including the ADG Code and 'Railways of Australia Code of Practices and Conditions for the Carriage of Dangerous Goods'
a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and induction documentation a.5. manufacturer’s specifications for equipment a.6. dangerous goods declarations and material safety data sheets (where
applicable) a.7. award, enterprise bargaining agreement, and other industrial
arrangements a.8. relevant Australian standards and certification requirements a.9. quality assurance procedures a.10. emergency procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
73
Range Of Variables (continued)
INVESTIGATE RAIL SAFETY INCIDENTS
VARIABLE SCOPE
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable regulations and legislation may include: a.1. relevant State/Territory regulations, codes of practice and safeworking
system requirements for the investigation of safety incidents a.2. the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network in situations
where safety incidents occur on that network a.3. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including: a.3.1. Australian and International Dangerous Goods Codes a.3.2. Australian and International Explosives Codes
a.4. Railways of Australia Code of Practices and Conditions for the Carriage of Dangerous Goods
a.5. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation a.6. workplace relations regulations a.7. workers compensation regulations
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
74
Evidence Guide
INVESTIGATE RAIL SAFETY INCIDENTS
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. recognise the implications of a safety incident a.2. plan a safety incident investigation a.3. carry out an investigation a.4. collect and analyse information a.5. make appropriate recommendations a.6. prepare a safety incident report a.7. select and appropriately use protective clothing and equipment a.8. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.9. work effectively with others a.10. maintain workplace records a.11. select and use appropriate workplace colloquial and technical language
and communication
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job function
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Australian codes of practice, regulations and safeworking systems relevant to the investigation of safety incidents, including the ADG Code and the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network in situations where incidents occur on that network
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and guidelines c. Workplace procedures and policies for the investigation of safety incidents d. Focus of operation of work systems, equipment, management and site
operating systems for the investigation of safety incidents e. Problems that may occur when investigating safety incidents and
appropriate action that can be taken to resolve the problems f. Documentation and reporting requirements for the investigation of safety
incidents g. Data collection and analysis techniques required when investigating safety
incidents h. Ability to:
h.1. interpret instructions and plan and prioritise work h.2. conduct interviews and take statements h.3. prepare reports and recommendations h.4. select and use relevant computer/communication/office equipment
required when investigating safety incidents h.5. modify activities depending on differing workplace contexts, risk
situations and environments h.6. solve problems that arise when investigating safety incidents h.7. read and interpret instructions, procedures and information relevant to
the investigation of safety incidents h.8. negotiate, communicate and liaise effectively with others h.9. use required personal protective clothing and equipment conforming to
industry and OHS standards
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
75
Evidence Guide (continued)
INVESTIGATE RAIL SAFETY INCIDENTS
4. Resource
implications a. Access is required to opportunities to:
a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to investigate safety incidents, and/or
a.2. investigate safety incidents in an appropriate range of real or simulated safety incident situations in the workplace
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. recognising the implications of safety incidents a.2. planning and carrying out a safety investigation a.3. preparing a safety incident report a.4. maintaining workplace records
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements b.2. OHS regulations and hazard prevention policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including security procedures) b.4. manufacturer's instructions for the use of equipment b.5. procedures for the use of personal protection equipment b.6. obtaining assistance from other team members when required b.7. customer service and quality assurance procedures and policies b.8. environmental protection procedures
c. Action is taken promptly to report on safety incidents in accordance with regulatory requirements and workplace procedures
d. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
e. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace, including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail without damage to goods, equipment or personnel
6. Context for
assessment a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training
Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. at the Registered Training Organisation, and/or a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES
Collect, Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 2 2 3 2 2
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
76
TDTF2001A MANAGE EMERGENCIES Field F Occupational Health and Safety DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to manage emergencies in accordance with regulatory requirements, relevant codes of practice and workplace procedures, including identifying and responding to emergency situations, arranging follow-on support and assistance, and communicating with staff in accordance with workplace procedures and relevant code requirements.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Respond to emergency situations
a. Emergency and potential emergency situations are promptly identified and assessed and needs are prioritised in accordance with the workplace emergency response plan/procedures
b. Situations are handled appropriately following emergency c. Incident reports are completed accurately in accordance with regulatory and
workplace procedures
2. Take required action during an emergency
a. Responsibilities are fulfilled in accordance with the workplace emergency response plan and code/regulatory requirements
b. Assistance is provided to other staff in conducting an initial survey of the scene of an emergency
c. Assistance is provided in controlling the site both prior to and following arrival of emergency services
d. Directions of the controlling emergency authority are followed and all possible assistance is provided in response to those directions
3. Arrange follow-on
support and assistance
a. Medical assistance and support is arranged as required in accordance with workplace procedures
b. First aid is provided pending the arrival of medical assistance within limits of responsibility and competence in accordance with workplace procedures
4. Communicate with
staff a. Staff and customers are provided with relevant, appropriate and timely advice
on emergency situations and instructions to be followed on an ongoing basis b. Evacuation procedures for staff/customers are demonstrated and explained in
accordance with workplace procedures c. Customer service and safety needs arising from emergency situations are
identified and acted upon in accordance with regulatory and workplace requirements
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
77
Range Of Variables
MANAGE EMERGENCIES
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be carried out in compliance with the relevant codes, safeworking systems, regulations and workplace requirements concerning the management of emergencies
b. Work is performed under some supervision generally within a team environment
c. Work involves the application of workplace procedures and regulatory requirements to the management of emergencies as part of work activities in the transport, distribution and/or allied industries
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be conducted in a range of work environments by day or night b. Customers may be internal or external c. Workplaces may comprise large, medium or small worksites d. Work may be conducted in:
d.1. limited or restricted spaces d.2. exposed conditions d.3. controlled or open environments
e. Emergency situations may include: e.1. chemical spills e.2. fires e.3. bomb threats e.4. derailments e.5. customer emergency
f. Hazards in the work area may include exposure to: f.1. chemicals f.2. dangerous or hazardous substances h.3. movements of equipment, goods, materials and vehicular traffic
g. Consultative processes may involve: g.1. other employees, supervisors and managers g.2. affected customers g.3. official representatives g.4. relevant authorities and institutions g.5. management and union representatives g.6. industrial relations and OHS specialists
h. Communication in the work area may include: h.1. phone h.2. electronic data interchange (EDI) h.3. fax h.4. e-mail h.5. Internet h.6. RF systems h.7. oral, aural or signed communications
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
78
Range Of Variables (continued)
MANAGE EMERGENCIES
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: i.1. company procedures i.2. enterprise procedures i.3. organisational procedures i.4. established procedures
j. Personal protection equipment may include: j.1. gloves j.2. safety headwear and footwear j.3. safety glasses j.4. two-way radios j.5. high visibility clothing
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Information/documents may include: a.1. relevant regulatory and/or code requirements for the management of
emergencies a.2. workplace procedures and policies for the management of emergencies
including emergency response plan where applicable a.3. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including the ADG Code and 'Railways of Australia Code of Practices and Conditions for the Carriage of Dangerous Goods'
a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and induction documentation including first aid manual
a.5. manufacturer’s specifications for equipment a.6. dangerous goods declarations and material safety data sheets (where
applicable) a.7. award, enterprise bargaining agreement, and other industrial
arrangements a.8. relevant Australian standards and certification requirements a.9. quality assurance procedures a.10. emergency procedures
4. Applicable
regulations and legislation
a. Applicable regulations and legislation may include: a.1. relevant State/Territory regulations, codes of practice and safeworking
system requirements for management of emergencies a.2. the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network in situations
where emergencies occur on that network a.3. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including: a.3.1. Australian and International Dangerous Goods Codes a.3.2. Australian and International Explosives Codes
a.4. Railways of Australia Code of Practices and Conditions for the Carriage of Dangerous Goods
a.5. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation a.6. workplace relations regulations a.7. workers compensation regulations
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
79
Evidence Guide
MANAGE EMERGENCIES
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. respond to emergency situations a.2. arrange follow-on support and assistance a.3. handle emergencies in an appropriate manner a.4. select and appropriately use protective clothing a.5. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.6. work effectively with others a.7. maintain workplace records a.8. communicate with staff/customers a.9. follow the emergency response plan/procedures
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job function
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Australian codes of practice, regulations and safeworking systems relevant to the management of emergencies, including the ADG Code and the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network in situations where incidents occur on that network
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and guidelines c. Workplace procedures and policies for the management of emergencies,
including the elements of an emergency response plan and first aid procedures where applicable
d. Focus of operation of work systems, equipment, management and site operating systems for the management of emergencies
e. Problems that may occur when managing emergencies and appropriate action that can be taken to resolve the problems
f. Documentation and reporting requirements for the management of emergencies
g. Hazards that may occur in transport and allied industries that can lead to emergency situations, and related hazard control strategies, including: g.1. handling hot food and equipment g.2. sudden and unexpected movement g.3. infectious and contagious diseases g.4. self-closing doors g.5. sharp objects g.6. syringes and drugs g.7. contact with human and biological waste g.8 fire and explosion g.9. collision g.10 derailment of trains g.11 handling, storage and carriage of dangerous goods and other hazardous
substances g.12. handling, storage and carriage of explosives
h. Data collection and analysis techniques required when managing emergencies
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
80
Evidence Guide (continued)
MANAGE EMERGENCIES
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
i. Ability to: i.1. interpret instructions and plan and prioritise work i.2. conduct interviews and take statements i.3. prepare reports and recommendations i.4. select and use relevant computer/communication/office equipment
required when managing emergencies i.5. modify activities depending on differing workplace contexts, risk
situations and environments i.6. solve problems that arise when managing emergencies i.7. read and interpret instructions, procedures and information relevant to
the management of emergencies i.8. follow emergency response plan/procedures i.9. use required personal protective clothing and equipment conforming to
industry and OHS standards
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other simulated
practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to manage emergencies, and/or
a.2. manage emergencies in an appropriate range of real or simulated emergency situations in the workplace
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. responding to emergency situations a.2. arranging follow-on support and assistance a.3. handling emergencies a.4. selecting and appropriately using protective clothing a.5. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information a.7. communicating with staff/customers a.8. following the emergency response plan/procedures
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements b.2. OHS regulations and hazard prevention policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including security and
housekeeping procedures) b.4. manufacturer's instructions for the use of equipment b.5. procedures for the use of personal protection equipment b.6. obtaining assistance from other team members when required b.7. customer service and quality assurance procedures and policies b.8. environmental protection procedures
c. Action is taken promptly to respond to emergency situations in accordance with regulatory requirements and workplace emergency procedures
d. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
e. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace, including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail without damage to goods, equipment or personnel
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
81
Evidence Guide (continued)
MANAGE EMERGENCIES
6. Context for
assessment a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training
Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. at the Registered Training Organisation, and/or a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES
Collect, Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
82
TDTF5701A APPLY THE ‘CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE DEFINED INTERSTATE RAIL NETWORK’ TO INTERFACE COORDINATION MANAGEMENT
Field F Occupational Heath and Safety DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to apply the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network to the management of interface coordination in rail organisations that are involved with the Defined Interstate Rail Network, including developing and implementing interface coordination plans, participating in the negotiation of track access agreements and rail safety accreditation arrangements, managing the investigation and reporting of safety incidents, and participating in the development and implementation of Emergency Response Plans. Note: Throughout the unit it is expected that the relevant workplace management policies and procedures are known and applied. This unit will usually be packaged with other relevant units concerned with interface coordination management and will need to be customised to match the operational contexts, occupational structures and procedures of the organisations concerned. ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Develop and implement interface coordination plans
a. Preparation of an Interface Coordination Plan that meets Code requirements is undertaken in collaboration with other parties in accordance with the scope of managerial responsibility
b. Confidentiality issues associated with the development and implementation of an Interface Coordination Plan are handled in accordance with Code requirements
c. A contribution is made to the implementation of the Interface Coordination Plan in accordance with Code requirements and the scope of managerial responsibility
d. Interface issues in the development and implementation of the Interface Coordination Plan are handled in accordance with Code requirements
2. Participate in the
negotiation of Track Access Agreements and Rail Safety Accreditation arrangements
a. Participation in the negotiation of Track Access Agreements and Rail Safety Accreditation arrangements is in accordance with Code requirements and the scope of managerial responsibility
b. Systems and procedures for the management of ‘restriction information’ are implemented in accordance with Code requirements
3. Manage safety incidents
a. Safety incidents and notifiable occurrences are managed and investigated as per Code requirements in accordance with the scope of managerial responsibility
b. Safety incidents and notifiable occurrences are reported and recorded as per Code requirements in accordance with the scope of managerial responsibility
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
83
4. Participate in the development and implementation of an ER Plan
a. An appropriate contribution is made to the development of an Emergency Response Plan (ER Plan) that meets Code requirements in accordance with the scope of managerial responsibility
b. ER Plan is disseminated and implemented in accordance with Code requirements, established procedures and the scope of managerial responsibility
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
84
Range Of Variables APPLY THE ‘CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE DEFINED INTERSTATE RAIL NETWORK’ TO INTERFACE COORDINATION MANAGEMENT
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be carried out in compliance with the relevant sections of the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment, problem solving, leadership and decision
making for self and others in planning and using resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment
a. The ‘Defined Interstate Rail Network’ is any railway system or part of a railway system, designated by its owner as a route to be used for the movement of interstate traffic
b. Terminology and related meanings are as defined in the Glossary of Terms contained in the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network
c. An Interface Coordination Plan incorporates: c.1. a full description of the scope of the railway operation being undertaken
and all parties involved c.2. identification of the interface issues between the organisations c.3. clear delineation of the responsibilities of each party in relation to the
interface issues and identification of the data to be communicated by each party
c.4. identification of the nominated first point of contact for each party with respect to the Plan for: c.4.1. the provision of data to other organisations c.4.2. the assessment of the engineering and operational systems
compatibility c.5. identification of procedures for:
c.5.1. the exchange and communication of interface data and information including distribution lists, confidentiality issues and dispute resolution procedures
c.5.2. the reporting and investigation of incidents and notifiable occurrences, including reporting protocol and responsible persons
c.5.3. the auditing of each parties compliance with the Plan c.5.4. document control c.5.5. review of the Plan
c.6. identification of related documentation, for example supporting standards
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
85
Range Of Variables (continued) APPLY THE ‘CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE DEFINED INTERSTATE RAIL NETWORK’ TO INTERFACE COORDINATION MANAGEMENT VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
d. Interface issues that may be handled by a manager in an organisation involved with the Defined Interstate Rail Network may include but are not restricted to: d.1. vehicle configuration, axle load and speed d.2. clearances between rolling stock and adjacent structures d.3. train length/mass d.4. interaction of the wheel and rail d.5. marshalling rail vehicles d.6. rail vehicle/train class d.7. train failures, incidents and accidents d.8. communication of restrictions and notices to trains d.9. communication of identification d.10. train interaction with train control d.11. train interaction with workers d.12. train interaction with signalling systems d.13. train interaction with signs d.14. workers interaction with electrical infrastructure d.15. electrical compatibility of systems d.16. interface with other transport modes d.17. interface with the environment
e. Rail safety related worker functions may include but are not limited to: e.1. driving and operation of trains e.2. controlling and signalling the movement of trains e.3. working on track infrastructure or rolling stock e.4. shunting and terminal operations e.5. any other activities occurring on or near the track
f. A Train Authority is an instruction in the prescribed format issued by the train controller in connection with the movement of a train
g. Occupancy authorities are formal authorities issued to a train crew or track work supervisor allowing occupancy or obstruction of one or more block sections and may include: g.1. proceed authority (PA) g.2. proceed restricted authority (PRA) g.3. work authority (WA) g.4. shunt authority (SHA) g.5. conditional proceed authority (CPA) g.6. local possession (LP) g.7. track occupancy authority (TOA) g.8. track work authority (TWA) g.9. train running information (TRI) g.10. no authority required (NAR)
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
86
Range Of Variables (continued) APPLY THE ‘CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE DEFINED INTERSTATE RAIL NETWORK’ TO INTERFACE COORDINATION MANAGEMENT VARIABLE SCOPE
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include but are not limited to: a.1. Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network a.2. instructions of relevant rail authorities concerning rail operations and
safeworking a.3. workplace procedures, policies and work instructions a.4. Emergency Response Plan (ER Plan) a.5. interface coordination plan a.6. rail operations and safeworking competency standards a.7. rail safety accreditation documentation a.8. records and reports of safety incidents and notifiable occurrences a.9. track access agreements a.10. infrastructure restrictions, including permanent and temporary speed
restrictions and other warning and restrictions a.11. safeworking forms a.12. safety compliance monitoring records a.13. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements, including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable legislation, regulations and codes may include: a.1. national and State/Territory rail safety legislation a.2. Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network a.3. relevant national and State/Territory OHS legislation a.4. relevant national and State/Territory environmental protection legislation a.5. relevant national and State/Territory dangerous goods codes and
legislation a.6. relevant Australian Standards and certification requirements, including
AS4292 and AS3000 a.7. relevant licence or permit requirements and associated regulations a.8. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.9. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.10. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
87
Evidence Guide APPLY THE ‘CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE DEFINED INTERSTATE RAIL NETWORK’ TO INTERFACE COORDINATION MANAGEMENT 1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills within the scope of managerial responsibility to: a.1. develop and implement interface coordination plans a.2. participate in the negotiation of 'Track Access Agreements' and 'Rail
Safety Accreditation arrangements' a.3. manage the investigation and reporting of safety incidents and notifiable
occurrences a.4. participate in the development and implementation of an ER Plan a.5. locate, interpret and apply relevant information to inform the application of
the ‘Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network a.6. work effectively with others to ensure organisational compliance with the
‘Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network a.7. maintain relevant workplace records and documentation
2. Interdependent
assessment of units
a. This unit of competency must be assessed in conjunction with other competency units that form part of the job role of a manager involved in interface coordination with responsibilities for monitoring and managing compliance with the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant sections of the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network including: a.1. purpose of Code a.2. the definition and features of the Defined Interstate Network a.3. scope and implementation of Code a.4. Code administration a.5. structure and application (of Code)
b. General management principles and requirements of the Code including: b.1. underlying safety and uniformity principles b.2. safeworking systems including:
b.2.1. general understanding of systems and occupancy authorities b.2.2. an overview of system requirements b.2.3. an understanding of safeworking system types b.2.4. a comparative knowledge of safeworking systems b.2.5. a basic understanding of system limitations b.2.6. an understanding of the safeworking system–authority safety
management process, including: b.2.6.1. the four-step process b.2.6.2. dependency for safety
b.3. train separation requirements b.4. track occupancy requirements b.5. authorities b.6. route integrity requirements including:
b.6.1. general requirements b.6.2. position of points b.6.3. route occupancy requirements b.6.4. road/pedestrian crossing requirements
c. A managerial understanding of the Code rules including: c.1. interface rules c.2. train controlling rules c.3. train driving rules c.4. track working rules
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
88
Evidence Guide (continued) APPLY THE ‘CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE DEFINED INTERSTATE RAIL NETWORK’ TO INTERFACE COORDINATION MANAGEMENT 3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
d. A managerial understanding of various safeworking forms and their use, including: d.1. Train Authority Form d.2. Train Working Advice Form d.3. TOA Form d.4. Track Work Authority Advice Form d.5. TWA Form d.6. TRI Form
e. Procedures for the investigation and reporting of safety incidents and notifiable occurrences
f. Relevant safeworking equipment and responsibilities for its use, including safeworking forms
g. Relevant OHS and environmental protection legislation and policies h. Requirements for Emergency Response Plan (ER Plan) development and
implementation i. Procedures for maintaining safeworking documentation and records j. Rail terminology as defined in the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate
Rail Network
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of practical and theoretical assignments, exercises,
case studies and other assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to apply the requirements of the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network to the management of rail operations and safeworking; and/or
a.2. apply the requirements of the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network to actual day-to-day management of rail operations and safeworking
5. Consistency in
performance a. Consistently applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. developing and implementing interface coordination plans a.2. participating in the negotiation of 'Track Access Agreements' and 'Rail
Safety Accreditation arrangements' a.3. managing the investigation and reporting of safety incidents and notifiable
occurrences a.4. participating in the development and implementation of an ER Plan a.5. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information to inform the
application of the ‘Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network a.6. working effectively with others to ensure organisational compliance with
the ‘Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network a.7. maintaining relevant workplace records and documentation
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant rules under the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail
Network b.2. OHS regulations and hazard prevention policies and procedures b.3. workplace policies and procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
89
Evidence Guide (continued) APPLY THE ‘CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE DEFINED INTERSTATE RAIL NETWORK’ TO INTERFACE COORDINATION MANAGEMENT 5. Consistency in
performance (continued)
c. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify breaches of Code rules and safety incidents in accordance with the Code
d. Work is managed, controlled and completed systematically with required attention to detail
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace, including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for
assessment a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training
Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
90
TDTF5901A APPLY ‘CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE DEFINED INTERSTATE RAIL NETWORK’ TO OPERATIONS, HUMAN RESOURCES AND SAFEWORKING
Field F Occupational Heath and Safety DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to apply the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network to the management of operations, human resources and safeworking in rail organisations that are involved with the Defined Interstate Rail Network. This includes developing and confirming worker competence in safeworking; ensuring implementation of medical standards; managing systems for drug and alcohol control; monitoring and reviewing safety performance; and managing compliance with safeworking equipment requirements. Note: Throughout the unit it is expected that the relevant workplace management policies and procedures are known and applied. This unit will usually be packaged with other relevant units concerned with the management of operations, human resources and safeworking and will need to be customised to match the operational contexts, occupational structures and procedures of the organisations concerned.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Develop and confirm worker competence in safeworking
a. Rail safety-related functions for workers in the organisation are identified in accordance with Code requirements
b. Arrangements are made to ensure that rail safety workers working on or near the running lines are identified in accordance with Code requirements
c. Appropriate managerial action is taken to determine the competence and capacity of workers to perform rail safety-related functions in accordance with Code requirements
d. In situations where workers required to perform rail safety-related functions have not achieved specified competence requirements, appropriate action is initiated to assist those workers to achieve competency requirements
e. Systems for the development and maintenance of route- or area-specific competencies are administered in accordance with Code requirements and the scope of managerial responsibility
f. Medical standards and standards for operational and safeworking competence are specified and maintained in accordance with Code requirements and the scope of managerial responsibility
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
91
2. Ensure implementation of medical standards
a. Appropriate action is taken to ensure that workers are medically capable of undertaking nominated rail safety-related functions in a safe manner in accordance with the scope of managerial responsibility
b. Appropriate practical tests are organised in situations where standards are not met through clinical tests to identify if the worker concerned may continue to operate within the specified function
c. Appropriate action in accordance with organisation’s procedures and Code requirements is taken in situations where a worker required to perform rail safety-related functions is confirmed as not meeting specified medical standards
3. Manage systems
for drug and alcohol control
a. Zero alcohol and drug impairment policies are developed and implemented in accordance with Code requirements and the scope of managerial responsibility
b. Testing of rail workers for drug and alcohol is administered in accordance with Code requirements and organisation’s procedures
4. Monitor and
review safety performance
a. Systems for the monitoring of operational safeworking activities are administered in accordance with Code requirements and the scope of managerial responsibility
b. Safety performance reviews are carried out in accordance with Code requirements and organisation’s procedures
c. Appropriate corrective action is taken on problems identified during safety performance reviews in accordance with Code requirements and organisation’s procedures
d. Appropriate contributions are made in joint safety performance review meetings where incidents require corrective actions that affect more than one organisation
5. Manage
compliance with safeworking equipment requirements
a. Policies on the use of personal protective equipment are implemented and monitored in accordance with Code and organisation’s requirements
b. Systems for the management of safeworking forms are administered in accordance with Code requirements and the scope of managerial responsibility
c. Systems for the issue and withdrawal of safeworking keys are administered in accordance with Code requirements and the scope of managerial responsibility
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
92
Range Of Variables APPLY ‘CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE DEFINED INTERSTATE RAIL NETWORK’ TO OPERATIONS, HUMAN RESOURCES AND SAFEWORKING
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be carried out in compliance with the relevant sections of the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment, problem solving, leadership and decision
making for self and others in planning and using resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. The ‘Defined Interstate Rail Network’ is any railway system or part of a railway
system, designated by its owner as a route to be used for the movement of interstate traffic
b. Terminology and related meanings are as defined in the Glossary of Terms contained in the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network
c. Interface issues that may handled by a manager in an organisation involved with the Defined Interstate Rail Network may include but are not restricted to: c.1. vehicle configuration, axle load and speed c.2. clearances between rolling stock and adjacent structures c.3. train length/mass c.4. interaction of the wheel and rail c.5. marshalling rail vehicles c.6. rail vehicle/train class c.7. train failures, incidents and accidents c.8. communication of restrictions and notices to trains c.9. communication of identification c.10. train interaction with train control c.11. train interaction with workers c.12. train interaction with signalling systems c.13. train interaction with signs c.14. workers interaction with electrical infrastructure c.15. electrical compatibility of systems c.16. interface with other transport modes c.17. interface with the environment
d. Rail safety-related worker functions may include but are not limited to: d.1. driving and operation of trains d.2. controlling and signalling the movement of trains d.3. working on track infrastructure or rolling stock d.4. shunting and terminal operations d.5. any other activities occurring on or near the track
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
93
Range Of Variables (continued) APPLY ‘CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE DEFINED INTERSTATE RAIL NETWORK’ TO OPERATIONS, HUMAN RESOURCES AND SAFEWORKING VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
e. As specified in the Code, organisation’s systems for the development and maintenance of worker competence must take into account the following: e.1. rail safety workers shall be certified as competent in the relevant
safeworking requirements described in the Operations and Safeworking Code
e.2. safeworking assessments shall be conducted for each rail safety worker within three-yearly intervals
e.3. where the requirement for assessment exceeds the specified period by more than three months the rail safety worker not completing the re-assessment shall not carry out any operational and safeworking functions
e.4. a rail safety worker's safeworking competence shall be deemed to have lapsed where the worker ceases to be engaged in performing operational and safeworking functions for a continuous period of six months or more, but shall be reinstated once assessment is successfully completed
e.5. a rail safety worker's competence shall cease to be recognised where such competence has been withdrawn or suspended by any assessment organisation
f. Drug an alcohol testing must be conducted in compliance with relevant legislation and relevant Australian Standards (i.e. AS 4308, ‘Recommended practice for the collection, detection and quantification of drugs of abuse in urine’), and may include but is not limited to: f.1. intermittent or random testing of all rail safety workers f.2. testing when it is suspected that a rail safety worker is attempting to start
work under the influence of alcohol or other drugs f.3. testing after incidents or accidents where the involvement of alcohol or
other drugs could be a factor g. Systems for the development and maintenance of route- or area-specific
competencies include but are not limited to: g.1. for driving and operation of trains:
g.1.1. network route competencies (route knowledge) g.1.2. yard competencies for pertinent yards or stations on or adjoining
the Network g.1.3. communication protocols and interfacing requirements
g.2. for controlling and signalling the movement of trains: g.2.1. control room, board or panel, or signal box competencies g.2.2. communication protocols and interfacing requirements
g.3. for work on infrastructure or rolling stock: g.3.1. route, yard, infrastructure and rolling stock knowledge as
applicable for the work to be undertaken g.3.2. communication protocols and interfacing requirements
g.4. for shunting and terminal operations: g.4.1. yard and infrastructure knowledge as applicable for the work to
be undertaken g.4.2. communication protocols and interfacing requirements
g.5. for any other activities occurring on or near the track: g.5.1. track awareness g.5.2. electrification awareness g.5.3. communication protocols and interfacing requirements
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
94
Range Of Variables (continued) APPLY ‘CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE DEFINED INTERSTATE RAIL NETWORK’ TO OPERATIONS, HUMAN RESOURCES AND SAFEWORKING VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Sources of information/ documents
(continued)
h. Safety compliance monitoring systems include but are not limited to: h.1. the conducting of formal internal audits of procedural systems and
physical assets within appropriate intervals h.2. the regular observation of rail safety workers undertaking activities on the
job h.3. the initiation of corrective action where there is evidence of non-
compliance h.4. the prompt exchange of information between affected organisations when
serious non-compliance is detected h.5. the maintenance of safety compliance monitoring records
i. Safety clothing and equipment to be used by rail safety workers may include but is not limited to: i.1. high visibility clothing i.2. sunscreen and sunglasses i.3. insect repellent i.4. safety glasses, headwear, mask, footwear and gloves i.5. hearing protection i.6. safety devices i.7. lighting including strobe lighting i.8. hand tools
j. A Train Authority is an instruction in the prescribed format issued by the train controller in connection with the movement of a train
k. Occupancy authorities are formal authorities issued to a train crew or track work supervisor allowing occupancy or obstruction of one or more block sections, and may include: k.1. proceed authority (PA) k.2. proceed restricted authority (PRA) k.3. work authority (WA) k.4. shunt authority (SHA) k.5. conditional proceed authority (CPA) k.6. local possession (LP) k.7. track occupancy authority (TOA) k.8. track work authority (TWA) k.9. train running information (TRI) k.10. no authority required (NAR)
3. Sources of information/documents
a. Documentation/records may include but are not limited to: a.1. Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network a.2. instructions of relevant rail authorities concerning rail operations and
safeworking a.3. workplace procedures, policies and work instructions a.4. Medical Standards Handbook–Guidelines for Medical Practitioners
Conducting Examinations for Australian Rail Organisations a.5. rail operations and safeworking competency standards a.6. rail safety accreditation documentation a.7. records and reports of safety incidents and notifiable occurrences a.8. drug and alcohol policies a.9. track access agreements
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
95
Range Of Variables (continued) APPLY ‘CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE DEFINED INTERSTATE RAIL NETWORK’ TO OPERATIONS, HUMAN RESOURCES AND SAFEWORKING VARIABLE SCOPE
3. Sources of information/documents
(continued)
a.10. infrastructure restrictions, including permanent and temporary speed restrictions and other warning and restrictions
a.11. safeworking forms a.12. safety compliance monitoring records a.13. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements, including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable legislation, regulations and codes may include: a.1. national and State/Territory rail safety legislation a.2. Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network a.3. relevant national and State/Territory OHS legislation a.4. relevant national and State/Territory environmental protection legislation a.5. relevant national and State/Territory dangerous goods codes and
legislation a.6. relevant Australian Standards and certification requirements, including
AS4292 and AS3000 a.7. relevant licence or permit requirements and associated regulations a.8. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.9. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.10. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
96
Evidence Guide APPLY ‘CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE DEFINED INTERSTATE RAIL NETWORK’ TO OPERATIONS, HUMAN RESOURCES AND SAFEWORKING 1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills within the scope of managerial responsibility to: a.1. develop and confirm worker competence in safeworking a.2. ensure implementation of medical standards a.3. manage systems for drug and alcohol control a.4. monitor and review safety performance a.5. manage compliance with safeworking equipment requirements a.6. work effectively with others to ensure organisational compliance with the
Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network a.7. maintain relevant workplace records and documentation
2. Interdependent
assessment of units
a. This unit of competency must be assessed in conjunction with other competency units that form part of the job role of an operations, human resources and/or safeworking manager with responsibilities for monitoring and managing compliance with the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant sections of the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network including: purpose of Code a.1. the definition and features of the Defined Interstate Network a.2. scope and implementation of Code a.3. Code administration a.4. structure and application (of Code)
b. General management principles and requirements of the Code including: b.1. underlying safety and uniformity principles b.2. safeworking systems including:
b.2.1. general understanding of systems and occupancy authorities b.2.2. an overview of system requirements b.2.3. an understanding of safeworking system types b.2.4. a comparative knowledge of safeworking systems b.2.5. a basic understanding of system limitations b.2.6. an understanding of the safeworking system–authority safety
management process, including: b.2.6.1. the four-step process b.2.6.2. dependency for safety
b.3. train separation requirements b.4. track occupancy requirements b.5. authorities b.6. route integrity requirements including:
b.6.1. general requirements b.6.2. position of points b.6.3. route occupancy requirements b.6.4. road/pedestrian crossing requirements
c. A managerial understanding of the Code rules including: c.1. interface rules c.2. train controlling rules c.3. train driving rules c.4. track working rules
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
97
Evidence Guide (continued) APPLY ‘CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE DEFINED INTERSTATE RAIL NETWORK’ TO OPERATIONS, HUMAN RESOURCES AND SAFEWORKING 3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
d. A managerial understanding of various safeworking forms and their use, including: d.1. Train Authority Form d.2. Train Working Advice Form d.3. TOA Form d.4. Track Work Authority Advice Form d.5. TWA Form d.6. TRI Form
e. Relevant safeworking equipment and responsibilities for its use, including safeworking forms
f. Rail safety worker competency and identification requirements g. Relevant OHS and environmental protection legislation and policies h. Medical fitness requirements for rail safety workers i. Zero drug and alcohol policies and related testing procedures and issues j. Requirements for Emergency Response Plan (ER Plan) development and
implementation k. Procedures for maintaining safeworking documentation and records l. A managerial understanding of route standards including:
l.1. track gradients l.2. train length maximums (including locomotives) l.3. rolling stock outlines (including loading) l.4. tonnage maximums for trains l.5. axle load limits l.6. rolling stock and locomotives requirements l.7. examination and testing requirements for automatic train brakes on
locomotive hauled trains l.8. brake holding test requirements (retention tests) l.9. roll by inspections l.10. braking performance of trains l.11. identification issues l.12. train documentation requirements l.13. time issues including watches and clocks and time zone l.14. traffic management issues l.15. section running times and allowances l.16. an overview of the defined interstate network
m. Rail terminology as defined in the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network
4. Resource
implications a. Access is required to opportunities to:
a.1. participate in a range of practical and theoretical assignments, exercises, case studies and other assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to apply the requirements of the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network to the management of rail operations, human resources and safeworking; and/or
a.2. apply the requirements of the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network to actual day-to-day management of rail operations, human resources and safeworking
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
98
Evidence Guide (continued) APPLY ‘CODE OF PRACTICE FOR THE DEFINED INTERSTATE RAIL NETWORK’ TO OPERATIONS, HUMAN RESOURCES AND SAFEWORKING 5. Consistency in
performance a. Consistently applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. developing and confirming worker competence in safeworking a.2. ensuring implementation of medical standards a.3. managing systems for drug and alcohol control a.4. monitoring and reviewing safety performance a.5. managing compliance with safeworking equipment requirements a.6. working effectively with others to ensure organisational compliance with
the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network a.7. maintaining relevant workplace records and documentation
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant rules under the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail
Network b.2. OHS regulations and hazard prevention policies and procedures b.3. workplace policies and procedures
c. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify breaches of Code rules and safety incidents in accordance with the Code
d. Work is managed, controlled and completed systematically with required attention to detail
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace, including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for
assessment a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training
Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
99
TDTJ798B CONDUCT INTERNAL QUALITY AUDITS Field J Quality DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to conduct internal quality audits in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures including preparing for internal audit, scheduling internal audit, conducting audit and documenting findings, and reporting audit results in accordance with workplace requirements.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Prepare for internal audit
a. Benchmarks for the quality audit are established/identified b. Procedures required to be audited are identified and implications of non-
conformance estimated c. Technical and/or calibration requirements for audits are noted and (where
necessary) appropriate support personnel are identified d. Production schedules are examined to identify appropriate schedule for audit
2 Schedule internal audit
a. Audit timings are planned to ensure that relevant procedures are conducted within workplace agreed time intervals and timeframes
b. Audit frequency is adjusted based on importance of activities to the business unit, process or workplace changes or customer feedback
c. Contact is made with appropriate personnel and relevant appointments for the audit are made
3. Conduct audit and
document findings a. Methods for the conduct of the audit are established and confirmed b. Observations and interviews are conducted with (any) required approved third
party c. Documentation of observations and interview responses is completed
4. Report audit results
a. Audit results are discussed with personnel associated with the procedures or standards audit
b. Audit reports indicate compliances noted c. Non-compliance reports indicate location, relevant standard or procedure, and
supporting evidence
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
100
Range Of Variables
CONDUCT INTERNAL QUALITY AUDITS
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the sections of the
warehousing, storage, transport and distribution industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Audits may cover aspects of services, products, risks, work systems and workplace
f. Quality audits may be conducted as part of enterprise, site or licence requirements
g. Audits may be conducted alone or in conjunction with other staff from the enterprise or using external personnel
h. Hazards may include: h.1. confined spaces h.2. hazardous or dangerous materials/goods h.3. contamination of, or from, goods/materials being transported/stored h.4. fire/explosions h.5. noise, light, energy sources h.6. stationary and moving machinery, parts or components h.7. moving vehicles
i. Communication in the work area may include: i.1. phone i.2. electronic data interchange (EDI) i.3. fax i.4. e-mail i.5. Internet i.6. RF communications i.7. barcode readers i.8. oral, aural or signed communications
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
101
Range of Variables (continued)
CONDUCT INTERNAL QUALITY AUDITS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
j. Requirements for work may include: j.1. site restrictions and procedures j.2. use of safety and personal protection equipment j.3. systems and facilities for controlling storage environments j.4. specialised lifting and/or handling equipment j.5. incident/accident breakdown procedures j.6. additional gear and equipment j.7. noise restrictions j.8. hours of operations j.9. authorities and permits j.10. communications equipment
k. Hazard management is consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before safe working practices and personal protective equipment
l. Consultative processes may involve: l.1. other employees and supervisors l.2. suppliers, potential customers and existing clients l.3. relevant authorities and institutions l.4. government instrumentalities and l.5. emergency services l.6. management and union representatives l.7. industrial relations and OHS specialists l.8. other maintenance, professional or technical staff
m. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: m.1. company procedures m.2. enterprise procedures m.3. organisational procedures m.4. established procedures
3. Sources of information/documents
a. Information/documentation may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
workplace activities, including the ADG Code where applicable a.2. workplace operating procedures and policies a.3. supplier and/or client instructions a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. manufacturer’s specifications for equipment and environmental control
systems a.6. supplier's handling and storage advice a.7. quality and customer service standards and procedures a.8. material safety data sheets a.9. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of load
shifting equipment and storage facilities a.10. relevant Australian and International standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.11. communications technology equipment, oral, aural or signed
communications
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
102
Range of Variables (continued)
CONDUCT INTERNAL QUALITY AUDITS
VARIABLE SCOPE
3. Sources of information/ documents
(continued)
a.12. emergency procedures a.13. relevant competency standards and training materials a.14. QA plans, data and document control a.15. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. relevant codes and regulations including ADG Code where applicable a.2. relevant Australian and international standards and certification
requirements a.3. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation in
terms of duties of employers, employees, suppliers and contractors a.4. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.5. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.6. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.7. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
103
Evidence Guide
CONDUCT INTERNAL QUALITY AUDITS
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. identify requirements of an audit a.2. complete audits including the allocation and delegation of tasks in
accordance with workplace procedures a.3. manage own work to achieve workplace goals and required results a.4. suggest improvements to audit operations a.5. apply techniques to encourage appropriate participation of employees
and, where appropriate, suppliers and customers in the quality system a.6. locate, interpret and apply information relevant to the quality system a.7. provide customer/client service and work effectively with others a.8. use appropriate communication strategies and equipment a.9. maintain enterprise records and documentation a.10. apply the hierarchy of hazard control
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job role or function
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements including the ADG Code where applicable
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace procedures for the conduct of internal quality audits d. Problems that may occur during the conduct of internal quality audits and
action that can be taken to resolve or report the problems e. Risks and hazards related to the conduct of internal quality audits and ways
of controlling the risks involved f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include:
f.1. focus of operation of work systems, resources, management and workplace operating systems
f.2. equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and control mechanisms
f.3. enterprise business policies and plans including procedures for identification of non-compliance and best practice
f.4. application of relevant Australian Standards and certification requirements
f.5. quality procedures and implementation strategies f.6. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.7. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.8. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills f.9. relevant workplace documentation procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
104
Evidence Guide (continued)
CONDUCT INTERNAL QUALITY AUDITS
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g. Ability to: g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self in relation to activities g.1. read and interpret technical data, drawings, instructions and manuals g.2. identify and solve problems that may arise during the conduct of internal
quality audits g.3. provide leadership to others g.4. plan and organise activities g.5. select and apply appropriate application of technology, information
systems and procedures g.6 modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to conduct internal quality audits, and/or
a.2. conduct internal quality audits in an appropriate range of operational warehousing, storage, transport and distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. identifying the requirements of an audit a.2. completing an audit to workplace requirements a.3. managing own work to achieve workplace goals and required results a.4. suggesting improvements to audit operations a.5. applying techniques to encourage appropriate participation of employees
and where appropriate suppliers and customers in the quality system a.6. locating, interpreting and applying information relevant to the quality
system a.7. providing customer/client service and working effectively with others a.8. using appropriate communication strategies and equipment a.9. maintaining enterprise records and documentation a.10. applying the hierarchy of hazard control
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements
including local and international codes and regulations pertaining to the handling and storage of perishable food products
b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures)
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
105
Evidence Guide (continued)
CONDUCT INTERNAL QUALITY AUDITS
5. Consistency in
performance c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 2 3 2 2 2 2
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
106
TDTK698B EVALUATE SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS AND HARDWARE ENHANCEMENTS
Field K Computers and Technology DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to evaluate software requirements and hardware enhancements in accordance with workplace procedures including analysing requirements for improved computer applications, evaluating relevant software, investigating appropriate hardware enhancements, implementing system improvements, and measuring systemic improvement.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Analyse requirements for improved computer applications
a. Current aspects of business operations requiring improved computer technology are identified
b. Purpose and requirements of improved computer management systems are identified
c. Personnel are consulted for expert advice for potential matches of computer applications to required improvements in site operations
2. Evaluate software
a. Potential software programs are evaluated to meet workplace requirements b. Software applications are investigated for effectiveness to own operation
including degree of flexibility, customisation and integration potential c. Selected option is circulated to appropriate personnel for verification d. Level of technical support is assessed e. Software application selection is made
3. Investigate hardware enhancements
a. Hardware systems are evaluated for compatibility with selected software and workplace operations
b. Potential immediate and long-term risks/problems with hardware are identified and assessed
c. Recommendations are drafted and circulated for comment d. Final recommendations on suitable hardware are made
4. Implement system improvement
a. Selected hardware and software enhancements are implemented b. Training is provided to potential users of the technology c. Implementation of hardware and software is monitored
5. Measure systemic improvement
a. Methods of measuring system performance are identified b. Software and hardware performance is evaluated c. (Any) refinements or improvements to the system are implemented d. System performance is documented and reported to appropriate personnel
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
107
Range Of Variables
EVALUATE SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS AND HARDWARE ENHANCEMENTS
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the sections of the
warehousing, storage, transport and distribution industries involved in the evaluation of computer software requirements and hardware enhancements
b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Services, products, risks, work systems and requirements potentially vary in different sections of the enterprise
f. Customer and supplier contact and coordination is a requirement of these operations
g. Computer systems may be used for but are not limited to: g.1. stock management g.2. information storage g.3. invoicing g.4. payments g.5. manifests g.6. on board systems g.7. work organisation
h. Communication in the work area may include: h.1. phone h.2. electronic data interchange (EDI) h.3. fax h.4. e-mail h.5. Internet h.6. RF communications h.7. barcode readers h.8. oral, aural or signed communications
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
108
Range of Variables (continued)
EVALUATE SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS AND HARDWARE ENHANCEMENTS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Consultative processes may involve: i.1. other employees and supervisors i.2. suppliers and clients i.3. computer specialists i.4. software and hardware companies and distributors i.5. users of similar systems/technology i.6. management and union representatives i.7. industrial relations and OHS specialists i.8. other maintenance, professional or technical staff
j. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: j.1. company procedures j.2. enterprise procedures j.3. organisational procedures j.4. established procedures
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Information/documentation may include: a.1. codes of practice and regulations relevant to the evaluation of computer
software requirements and hardware enhancements a.2. workplace operating procedures and policies a.3. supplier and/or client instructions a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. manufacturer’s specifications and instructions for computer equipment,
and software a.6. relevant Australian and International standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.7. communications technology equipment, oral, aural or signed
communications a.8. quality assurance standards and procedures a.9. emergency procedures a.10. relevant competency standards and training materials a.11. QA plans, data and document control a.12. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. relevant codes and regulations for evaluation of computer software
requirements and hardware enhancements a.2. relevant Australian and international standards a.3. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation in
terms of duties of employers, employees, suppliers and contractors a.4. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.5. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.6. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.7. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
109
Evidence Guide
EVALUATE SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS AND HARDWARE ENHANCEMENTS
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. evaluate computerised information processing equipment, software and
operating systems to improve work effectiveness a.2. suggest improvements to computer operations and negotiate changes a.3. identify requirements of tasks and organise planning, job completion and
evaluation stages a.4. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.5. measure operational performance resulting from changes to technology a.6. use appropriate communication strategies and equipment a.7. maintain workplace records and documentation
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job role or function.
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements relevant to the evaluation of software requirements and hardware enhancements
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace procedures for the evaluation of software requirements and
hardware enhancements d. Problems that may occur during the evaluation of software requirements and
hardware enhancements and action that can be taken to resolve or report the problems
e. Risks and hazards related to the evaluation of software requirements and hardware enhancements and ways of controlling the risks involved
f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: f.1. focus of operation of computing systems, software and hardware
resources, management and workplace operating systems f.2. computer equipment and software applications, capacities and
configurations f.3. application of relevant Australian Standards f.4. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.5. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.6. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills f.7. relevant workplace documentation procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
110
Evidence Guide (continued)
EVALUATE SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS AND HARDWARE ENHANCEMENTS
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g. Ability to: g.1. suggest improvements to computer operations and negotiate changes g.2. measure operational performance improvements resulting from changes
to computer technology g.3. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to workplace
activities g.4. read and interpret technical data, drawings, instructions and manuals g.5. identify and solve problems that may arise during the evaluation of
software requirements and hardware enhancements g.6. provide leadership to others g.7. plan and organise activities g.8. select and apply appropriate software, technology, information systems
and procedures g.9. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to evaluate software requirements and hardware enhancements, and/or
a.2. evaluate software requirements and hardware enhancements in an appropriate range of operational warehousing, storage, transport or distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. evaluating computerised information processing equipment, software and operating systems
a.2. suggesting improvements to computer operations and negotiating changes
a.3. identifying requirements of tasks and organising planning, job completion and evaluation stages
a.4. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information a.5. measuring operational performance resulting from changes to
technology a.6. using appropriate communication strategies and equipment a.7. maintaining workplace records and documentation
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements
including local and international codes and regulations pertaining to the handling and storage of perishable food products
b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures)
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
111
Evidence Guide (continued)
EVALUATE SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS AND HARDWARE ENHANCEMENTS
5. Consistency in
performance c. When allocating tasks consistently considers competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 2 3 3
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
112
TDTL1298B APPLY WORKPLACE KNOWLEDGE TO PLAN IMPROVEMENTS TO OPERATIONS
Field L Resource Management DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to apply workplace knowledge to plan improvements to operations in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace policies. This includes analysing the work flow in the workplace in relation to productivity; coordinating and advising on work practices; identifying industrial relations processes which affect the workplace and the operations of its various zones; organising staff and equipment to complete specific tasks; and assisting the team to maintain workplace security.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Analyse work flow in the workplace in relation to productivity
a. The flow of work is identified including the effect that variation(s) in workflow has on operations
b. Assessment of factors which affect productivity, such as seasonality, high and low workload periods, and the volume of output of zones, is made
c. Key processes are analysed to detect any areas which may impact on workflow effectiveness
d. Variance of workflows against agreed benchmarks are documented e. Workflow variances are considered, alternate solutions generated, and
recommendations to resolve the issue(s) are made
2. Coordinate and advise on work practices
a. Work practices of a zone are based on the type of product, storage requirements, work flow and regulatory requirements
b. Recommendations for improved work practices are forwarded to appropriate personnel
c. Appropriate enterprise OHS and other regulatory procedures are followed when handling stock and operating load shifting equipment
d. Advice to line manager is provided on the allocation of staff and resources required to handle products with special handling or storage requirements
3. Identify industrial
relations processes which affect the workplace and the operations of its various zones
a. Awards and enterprise agreements are analysed to identify aspects which may contribute to the effectiveness of work operations
b. Opportunities for training and development are identified within the workplace context and enterprise procedures
c. Processes for negotiation of changes at enterprise level to improve workplace effectiveness are identified
d. Issues which may lead to improved work effectiveness of teams and individuals are raised within workplace policies and procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
113
4. Organise staff and equipment to complete specific tasks
a. Priorities of tasks are identified and workplace personnel are informed b. Competency needs for the work are identified and staff allocated and/or trained
and assessed to meet these needs c. Individual records are checked to determine if appropriate competencies are
held d. Appropriate action is undertaken to match workplace requirements with
employee competency level e. Workplace personnel and equipment are organised to meet requirements
ensuring that work loads are balanced and other workplace activities are met f. Workplace policies and procedures are amended and trialed to improve
performance g. Operating procedures and methods are explained to workplace personnel and
follow up communication methods are used to ensure that work requirements are applied
5. Assist the team to
maintain workplace security
a. Workplace personnel are informed of policies and procedures in relation to security
b. Workplace personnel are provided with feedback in relation to the implementation/non-implementation of security procedures
c. Employees are provided with on-going supervision and training to facilitate awareness and detection of theft
d. Matters likely to affect security are reported in accordance within workplace policy
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
114
Range Of Variables
APPLY WORKPLACE KNOWLEDGE TO PLAN IMPROVEMENTS TO OPERATIONS
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the sections of the
warehousing, storage, transport and distribution industries involved in the handling and storage of perishable food products
b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site locations d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Services, products, risks, work systems and requirements potentially vary in different sections of the workplace
f. Customer and supplier contact and coordination is a requirement of these operations
g The environment for this unit involves defined workplace policies and procedures within which work and employees must be coordinated and work organised.
h. Hazards may include: h.1. confined spaces h.2. hazardous or dangerous materials h.3. contamination of, or from, materials being handled h.4. fire/explosions h.5. noise, light, energy sources h.6. stationary and moving machinery, parts or components h.7. moving vehicles
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
115
Range of Variables (continued)
APPLY WORKPLACE KNOWLEDGE TO PLAN IMPROVEMENTS TO OPERATIONS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Requirements for work may include: i.1. site restrictions and procedures i.2. use of safety and personal protection equipment i.3. systems and facilities for work operations i.4. specialised lifting and/or handling equipment i.5. incident/accident breakdown procedures i.6. additional gear and equipment i.7. noise restrictions i.8. hours of operations i.9. authorities and permits i.10. communications equipment
j. Hazard management is consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before safe working practices and personal protective equipment
k. Consultative processes may involve: k.1. other employees and supervisors k.2. suppliers, potential customers and existing clients k.3. relevant authorities and institutions k.4. government instrumentalities k.5. emergency services k.6. management and union representatives k.7. industrial relations and OHS specialists k.8. other maintenance, professional or technical staff
l. Communication in the work area may include: l.1. phone l.2. electronic data interchange (EDI) l.3. fax l.4. e-mail l.5. Internet l.6. RF communications l.7. bar code readers l.8. oral, aural or signed communications
m. Personal protection equipment may include but is not limited to: m.1. gloves m.2. safety headwear and footwear m.3. safety clothing m.4. safety glasses m.5. two-way radios m.6. high visibility clothing
n. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: n.1. company procedures n.2. enterprise procedures n.3. organisational procedures n.4. established procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
116
Range of Variables (continued)
APPLY WORKPLACE KNOWLEDGE TO PLAN IMPROVEMENTS TO OPERATIONS
VARIABLE SCOPE
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Information/documentation may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
workplace activities including the ADG Code where applicable a.2. workplace operating procedures, standards and policies a.3. supplier and/or client instructions a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. audit reports concerning quality, OHS, environment, operations,
customer service a.6. workplace statistics a.7. manufacturer’s specifications for equipment and systems a.8. supplier's advice for the handling, transport and storage of goods and
materials a.9. material safety data sheets a.10. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of load
shifting equipment and storage facilities a.11. relevant Australian and international standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.12. communications technology equipment, oral, aural or signed
communications a.13. quality assurance standards and procedures a.14. emergency procedures a.15. relevant competency standards and training materials a.16. QA plans, data and document control a.17. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. relevant codes and regulations including the ADG Code where applicable a.2. relevant Australian and international standards and certification
requirements a.3. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation in
terms of duties of employers, employees, suppliers and contractors a.4. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.5. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.6. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.7. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
117
Evidence Guide
APPLY WORKPLACE KNOWLEDGE TO PLAN IMPROVEMENTS TO OPERATIONS
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. coordinate teams and resources to meet designated outcomes a.2. negotiate with supervisors to institute procedures to minimise risks
and/or maximise opportunities a.3. communicate information on products and work system requirements a.4. identify resource requirements (physical and human) for particular needs a.5. apply techniques to encourage appropriate participation of team/group
members and external organisations or individual with relevant expertise a.6. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.7. provide customer/client service and work effectively with others a.8. maintain enterprise records and documentation a.9. apply the hierarchy of hazard control
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job role or function
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international regulations relevant to workplace activities and the ADG Code where applicable
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace procedures for the planning of improvements to operations d. Problems that may occur during the planning of improvements to operations
and action that can be taken to resolve or report the problems e. Risks and hazards related to the planning of improvements to operations
and ways of controlling the risks involved f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include:
f.1. focus of operation of work systems, resources, management and workplace operating systems
f.2. equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and control mechanisms
f.3. requirements to handle, transport and store products in the most safe and effective way
f.4. processes to implement changes to workplace procedures and policies f.5. application of relevant Australian Standards f.6. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.7. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.8. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills f.9. relevant workplace documentation procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
118
Evidence Guide (continued)
APPLY WORKPLACE KNOWLEDGE TO PLAN IMPROVEMENTS TO OPERATIONS
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g. Ability to: g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to workplace
activities g.2. read and interpret technical data, drawings, instructions and manuals g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the planning and
management of the handling and storage of perishable food products g.4. apply relevant industrial requirements to planning activities g.5. provide leadership to others g.6. plan and organise activities g.7. select and apply appropriate application of technology, information
systems and procedures g.8 modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to plan improvements to operations, and/or
a.2. apply workplace knowledge to plan improvements to operations in an appropriate range of operational warehousing, storage, transport and distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. coordinating teams and resources to meet designated outcomes a.2. negotiating with supervisors to institute procedures to minimise risks
and/or maximise opportunities a.3. communicating information on products and work system requirements a.4. identifying resource requirements (physical and human) for particular
needs a.5. applying techniques to encourage appropriate participation of
team/group members and external organisations or individual with relevant expertise
a.6. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information a.7. providing customer/client service and working effectively with others a.8. maintaining enterprise records and documentation a.9. applying the hierarchy of hazard control
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements
including local and international codes and regulations pertaining to workplace activities
b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures) c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified incidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
119
Evidence Guide (continued)
APPLY WORKPLACE KNOWLEDGE TO PLAN IMPROVEMENTS TO OPERATIONS
5. Consistency in
performance e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a
suitable range of contexts f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 2 2 3 2
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
120
TDTL1398B ESTABLISH AND MANAGE EFFECTIVE WORKPLACE RELATIONS Field L Resource Management DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to establish and manage effective workplace relations in accordance with workplace procedures, including managing difficulties to achieve positive outcomes, developing trust and confidence, building and maintaining networks and relationships and managing difficulties to achieve positive outcomes.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Manage difficulties to achieve positive outcomes
a. Information to achieve work responsibilities is collected from appropriate sources
b. The method(s) used to communicate ideas and information is appropriate to the audience
c. Communication takes into account social and cultural diversity d. Input from internal and external sources is sought and valued in developing
and refining new ideas and approaches
2. Develop trust and confidence
a. People are treated with integrity, respect and empathy b. Workplace social, ethical and business standards are used to develop and
maintain positive relationships c. Trust and confidence of colleagues, customers and suppliers is gained and
maintained through competent performance d. Appropriate tasks and responsibilities are delegated to employees and
appropriate reporting systems established for the delegations e. Interpersonal styles and methods are adjusted to the social and cultural
environment
3. Build and maintain networks and relationships
a. Networking is used to identify and build relationships b. Networks and other work relationships provide identifiable benefits for the team
and the workplace
4. Manage difficulties to achieve positive outcomes
a. Problems are identified and analysed, and action is taken to rectify the situation with minimal disruption to performance
b. Colleagues receive guidance and support to resolve their work difficulties c. Continued poor performance is managed within the workplace processes d. Conflict is managed constructively within the workplace processes e. Difficult situations are negotiated to achieve results acceptable to the
participants, and which meet workplace and regulatory requirements
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
121
Range Of Variables
ESTABLISH AND MANAGE EFFECTIVE WORKPLACE RELATIONS
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgement for self and others in planning and
using resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the sections of the
warehousing, storage, transport and distribution b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site locations d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Services, products, risks, work systems and requirements potentially vary in different sections of the workplace
f. Customer and supplier contact and coordination is a requirement of these operations
g This unit requires the application of the individual’s knowledge of the enterprise, its industry, suppliers and customers to developing effective working relationships with internal and external individuals and organisations
h. Hazards may include: h.1. confined spaces h.2. hazardous or dangerous materials h.3. contamination of, or from, materials being handled, transported and/or
stored h.4. fire/explosions h.5. noise, light, energy sources h.6. stationary and moving machinery, parts or components h.7. moving vehicles
i. Hazard management is consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before safe working practices and personal protective equipment
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
122
Range of Variables (continued)
ESTABLISH AND MANAGE EFFECTIVE WORKPLACE RELATIONS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
j. Requirements for work may include: j.1. site restrictions and procedures j.2. use of safety and personal protection equipment j.3. systems and facilities for workplace operations j.4. specialised lifting and/or handling equipment j.5. incident/accident/breakdown procedures j.6. additional gear and equipment j.7. noise restrictions j.8. hours of operations j.9. authorities and permits j.10. communications equipment
k. Consultative processes may involve: k.1. other employees and supervisors k.2. suppliers, potential customers and existing clients k.3. relevant authorities and institutions k.4. government instrumentalities k.5. persons from other organisations k.6. management and union representatives k.7. industrial relations and OHS specialists k.8. other maintenance, professional or technical staff
l. Communication in the work area may include: l.1. phone l.2. electronic data interchange (EDI) l.3. fax l.4. e-mail l.5. Internet l.6. RF communications l.7. barcode readers l.8. oral, aural or signed communications
m. Personal protection equipment may include but is not limited to: m.1. gloves m.2. safety headwear and footwear m.3. safety clothing m.4. safety glasses m.5. two-way radios m.6. high visibility clothing
n. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: n.1. company procedures n.2. enterprise procedures n.3. organisational procedures n.4. established procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
123
Range of Variables (continued)
ESTABLISH AND MANAGE EFFECTIVE WORKPLACE RELATIONS
VARIABLE SCOPE
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Information/documentation may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
workplace activities including the ADG Code where applicable a.2. workplace operating procedures, standards and policies a.3. supplier and/or client instructions a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. manufacturer’s specifications for equipment and systems a.6. supplier's advice for the handling, transport and storage of goods and
materials a.7. material safety data sheets a.8. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of load
shifting equipment and storage facilities a.9. relevant Australian and international standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.10. communications technology equipment, oral, aural or signed
communications a.11. quality assurance standards and procedures a.12. emergency procedures a.13. relevant competency standards and training materials a.14. QA plans, data and document control a.15. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. relevant codes and regulations a.2. relevant Australian and international standards and certification
requirements a.3. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation in
terms of duties of employers, employees, suppliers and contractors a.4. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.5. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.6. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.7. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
124
Evidence Guide
ESTABLISH AND MANAGE EFFECTIVE WORKPLACE RELATIONS
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. develop effective relationships in diverse internal and external
environments a.2. mix confidently with a broad range of people a.3. respond effectively to unexpected demands from a range of sources a.4. manage relationships to achieve workplace goals and required results a.5. apply techniques to encourage improvement in work relationships in a
diverse and complex workplace and external environment a.6. identify requirements of tasks and organise planning, job completion and
evaluation stages a.7. research, interpret and apply relevant information a.8. provide honest and constructive feedback a.9. maintain enterprise records and documentation
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job role or function
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international regulations relevant to the handling and storage of perishable food products
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace policies and procedures for the establishment and management of
effective workplace relations d. Problems that may occur when establishing and managing effective
workplace relations and action that can be taken to resolve or report the problems
e. Risks and hazards related to the establishment and management of effective workplace relations and ways of controlling the risks involved
f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: f.1. focus of operation of work systems, resources, management and
workplace operating systems f.2. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.3. mechanisms to strengthen and reinforce relationships within the
workplace f.4. equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and
control mechanisms f.5. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.6. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills f.7. application of relevant Australian Standards and related personnel
certification requirements f.8. relevant workplace documentation procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
125
Evidence Guide (continued)
ESTABLISH AND MANAGE EFFECTIVE WORKPLACE RELATIONS
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g. Ability to: g.1. strengthen and reinforce relationships within the workplace g.2. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to work activities g.3. read and interpret technical policies, regulations and instructions g.4. identify and solve problems that may arise when establishing and
managing effective workplace relations g.5. provide leadership to others g.6. plan and organise activities g.7. select and apply appropriate application of technology, information
systems and procedures g.8 modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to establish and manage effective workplace relations, and/or
a.2. establish and manage effective workplace relations in an appropriate range of operational warehousing, storage, transport and distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, customers, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. developing effective relationships in diverse internal and external environments
a.2. mixing confidently with a broad range of people a.3. responding effectively to unexpected demands from a range of sources a.4. managing relationships to achieve workplace goals and required results a.5. applying techniques to encourage improvement in work relationships in
a diverse and complex workplace and external environment a.6. identifying requirements of tasks and organising planning, job
completion and evaluation stages a.7. researching, interpreting and applying relevant information a.8. providing feedback a.9. maintaining enterprise records and documentation
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements
including local and international codes and regulations pertaining to workplace activities
b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures) c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
126
Evidence Guide (continued)
ESTABLISH AND MANAGE EFFECTIVE WORKPLACE RELATIONS
5. Consistency in
performance e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a
suitable range of contexts f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 2 3 2
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
127
TDTL1498B EVALUATE AND SELECT WAREHOUSE RESOURCES Field L Resource Management DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to evaluate and select warehouse resources with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures, including defining objectives for required warehouse operations, specifying equipment and system performance functions, evaluating and selecting equipment, and documenting the processes in accordance with workplace requirements.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Define objectives for required warehouse operations
a. Requirements for warehouse activities are identified in terms of critical parameters
b. Existing systems are evaluated to match requirements of proposed operations c. Current best practice and future trends for handling, storage and cartage
equipment are assessed to establish comparisons.
2. Specify equipment and system performance functions
a. Specifications of equipment and systems are documented b. Consultations are conducted with relevant warehouse employees and
management to identify additional or altered specifications
3. Evaluate and select equipment
a. A rating system is instigated to facilitate comparisons of cost/benefits and other qualitative properties of equipment and systems
b. Equipment is selected based on comparisons of performance, cost, specifications and applicability to future operating processes
4. Document
processes a. Workplace documentation, including operating procedures, is completed and
posted as appropriate b. (Any) ongoing maintenance requirements for equipment are communicated to
relevant personnel c. Reports are compiled and forwarded to appropriate personnel
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
128
Range Of Variables
EVALUATE AND SELECT WAREHOUSE RESOURCES
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgement for self and others in planning and
using resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the sections of the
warehousing and storage industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site locations d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Critical parameters for the establishing warehouse requirements may include but are not limited to: e.1. types of inventory e.2. quantities e.3. handling requirements e.4. storage requirements e.5. stock control methods
f. Physical resources may include: f.1. picking systems f.2. materials handling equipment f.3. inventory tracking systems f.4. storage systems f.5. computer systems
g. Customer and supplier contact and coordination is a requirement of these operations
h. Hazards may include: h.1. confined spaces h.2. hazardous or dangerous materials h.3. contamination of, or from, materials being handled h.4. fire/explosions h.5. noise, light, energy sources h.6. stationary and moving machinery, parts or components h.7. moving vehicles/plant
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
129
Range of Variables (continued)
EVALUATE AND SELECT WAREHOUSE RESOURCES
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Hazard management is consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before safe working practices and personal protective equipment
j. Requirements for work may include: j.1. site restrictions and procedures j.2. use of safety and personal protection equipment j.3. systems, storage areas and facilities required for warehouse operation j.4. specialised lifting and/or handling equipment j.5. incident/accident/breakdown procedures j.6. noise restrictions j.7. hours of operations j.8. regulatory requirements, authorities and permits j.9. communications equipment
k. Consultative processes may involve: k.1. other employees and supervisors k.2. suppliers, potential customers and existing clients k.3. relevant authorities and institutions k.4. emergency services k.5. management and union representatives k.6. industrial relations and OHS specialists k.7. other maintenance, professional or technical staff
l. Communication in the work area may include: l.1. phone l.2. electronic data interchange (EDI) l.3. fax l.4. e-mail l.5. Internet l.6. RF communications l.7. barcode readers l.8. oral, aural or signed communications
m. Personal protection equipment may include but is not limited to: m.1. gloves m.2. safety headwear and footwear m.3. safety clothing m.4. safety glasses m.5. two-way radios m.6. high visibility clothing
n. Dependent of the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: n.1. company procedures n.2. enterprise procedures n.3. organisational procedures n.4. established procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
130
Range of Variables (continued)
EVALUATE AND SELECT WAREHOUSE RESOURCES
VARIABLE SCOPE
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Information/documentation may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
warehouse operations a.2. workplace operating procedures and policies a.3. supplier and/or client instructions a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. manufacturer’s specifications for equipment and environmental control
systems a.6. supplier's advice for handling, transport and storage of goods a.7. material safety data sheets a.8. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of load
shifting equipment and storage facilities a.9. relevant Australian and international standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.10. communications technology equipment, oral, aural or signed
communications a.11. quality assurance standards and procedures a.12. emergency procedures a.13. relevant competency standards and training materials a.14. QA plans, data and document control a.15. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. codes and regulations relevant to warehouse operations and
management including the ADG Code where applicable a.2. relevant Australian and international standards and certification
requirements a.3. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation in
terms of duties of employers, employees, suppliers and contractors a.4. license, patent or copyright arrangements a.5. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.6. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.7. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
131
Evidence Guide
EVALUATE AND SELECT WAREHOUSE RESOURCES
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. identify the quality and applicability of various warehouse equipment and
operating systems a.2. evaluate and select appropriate warehouse equipment a.3. identify improvements to existing operations and negotiate changes a.4. identify requirements of tasks and organise planning, job completion and
evaluation stages a.5. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.6. provide customer/client service and work effectively with others a.7. determine (any) required permits/licensing a.8. use appropriate communication strategies and equipment a.9. maintain workplace records and documentation a.10. apply the hierarchy of hazard control
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job role or function
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements relevant to the evaluation and selection of warehouse resources including the ADG Code where applicable
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace procedures for the evaluation and selection of warehouse
resources d. Problems that may occur during the evaluation and selection of warehouse
resources and action that can be taken to resolve or report the problems e. Risks and hazards related to the evaluation and selection of warehouse
resources and ways of controlling the risks involved f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include:
f.1. workplace business policies and plans including procedures for warehousing
f.2. focus of operation of interactive warehouse systems, resources, management and inventory systems
f.3. equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and control mechanisms
f.4. relevant regulatory, permit and licence requirements f.5. application of relevant Australian standards and associated certification
requirements f.6. operational procedures for safe transfer and storage of goods f.7. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.8. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.9. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills f.10. relevant workplace documentation procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
132
Evidence Guide (continued)
EVALUATE AND SELECT WAREHOUSE RESOURCES
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g. Ability to: g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to activities g.2. read and interpret policy, regulations, instructions and resource
specifications g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the evaluation and
selection of warehouse resources g.4. provide leadership to others g.5. plan and organise activities g.6. select and apply appropriate technology, storage, information systems
and procedures g.7. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to evaluate and select warehouse resources, and/or
a.2. evaluate and select warehouse resources in an appropriate range of operational warehousing, storage, transport and distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. identifying the quality and applicability of various warehouse equipment and operating systems
a.2. evaluating and selecting appropriate warehouse equipment a.3. identifying improvements to existing operations and negotiating changes a.4. identifying requirements of tasks and organising planning, job
completion and evaluation stages a.5. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information a.6. providing customer/client service and working effectively with others a.7. determining (any) required permits/licensing a.8. using appropriate communication strategies and equipment a.9. maintaining workplace records and documentation a.10. applying the hierarchy of hazard control
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements
pertaining to warehouse operation and management b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures) c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
133
Evidence Guide (continued)
EVALUATE AND SELECT WAREHOUSE RESOURCES
5. Consistency in
performance f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 2 3 3
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
134
TDTL1598B MANAGE CHANGE PROCESSES WITHIN THE ORGANISATION Field L Resource Management DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to manage change processes within an organisation in accordance with workplace procedures, including participating in planning the introduction of change, developing flexible approaches and solutions to problems within the workplace, and managing emerging challenges and opportunities.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Participate in planning the introduction of change
a. The manager contributes effectively to the workplace planning processes to introduce change
b. Plans to introduce change are made in consultation with designated individuals/groups
c. The workplace objectives and plans to introduce change are explained clearly to individuals/teams
2. Develop flexible
approaches and solutions
a. Alternative approaches to managing workplace issues and problems are identified and analysed
b. Risks are assessed and action is taken to achieve a recognised benefit or advantage to the workplace
c. The workplace is managed in a way which promotes the development of innovative approaches and outcomes
d. Responsive approaches to resource management improve productivity and/or reduces costs in the transport and distribution environment
3. Manage
emerging challenges and opportunities
a. Individuals/teams respond effectively and efficiently to changes in the workplace’s goals, plans and priorities
b. Coaching and mentoring assists individuals/teams develop competencies to handle change efficiently and effectively
c. The manager uses opportunities within area of responsibility and authority to make adjustments to respond to the changing needs of customers and the workplace
d. Individuals/teams are kept informed of progress in the implementation of change
e. Recommendations for improving the methods/techniques to manage change are negotiated with designated persons/groups
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
135
Range Of Variables
MANAGE CHANGE PROCESSES WITHIN THE ORGANISATION
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the warehousing,
storage, transport and distribution industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site locations d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Services, products, risks, work systems and requirements potentially vary in different sections of the workplace
f. Customer and supplier contact and coordination is a requirement of these operations
g This unit requires the application of the individual’s knowledge of the enterprise, its industry, suppliers and customers to developing effective working relationships with internal and external individuals and organisations
h. Hazards may include: h.1. confined spaces h.2. hazardous or dangerous materials h.3. contamination of, or from, materials being handled, transported and/or
stored h.4. fire/explosions h.5. noise, light, energy sources h.6. stationary and moving machinery, parts or components h.7. moving vehicles
i. Hazard management is consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before safe working practices and personal protective equipment
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
136
Range of Variables (continued)
MANAGE CHANGE PROCESSES WITHIN THE ORGANISATION
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
j. Requirements for work may include: j.1. site restrictions and procedures j.2. use of safety and personal protection equipment j.3. systems and facilities for workplace operations j.4. specialised lifting and/or handling equipment j.5. incident/accident/breakdown procedures j.6. additional gear and equipment j.7. noise restrictions j.8. hours of operations j.9. authorities and permits j.10. communications equipment
k. Consultative processes may involve: k.1. other employees and supervisors k.2. suppliers, potential customers and existing clients k.3. relevant authorities and institutions k.4. government instrumentalities k.5. persons from other organisations k.6. management and union representatives k.7. industrial relations and OHS specialists k.8. other maintenance, professional or technical staff
l. Communication in the work area may include: l.1. phone l.2. electronic data interchange (EDI) l.3. fax l.4. e-mail l.5. Internet l.6. RF communications l.7. bar code readers l.8. oral, aural or signed communications
m. Personal protection equipment may include but is not limited to: m.1. gloves m.2. safety headwear and footwear m.3. safety clothing m.4. safety glasses m.5. two-way radios m.6. high visibility clothing
n. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: n.1. company procedures n.2. enterprise procedures n.3. organisational procedures n.4. established procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
137
Range of Variables (continued)
MANAGE CHANGE PROCESSES WITHIN THE ORGANISATION
VARIABLE SCOPE
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Information/documentation may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
workplace operations a.2. workplace operating procedures and policies a.3. supplier and/or client instructions a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. manufacturer’s specifications for equipment and systems a.6. supplier's advice for handling, transport and storage of goods and
materials a.7. material safety data sheets a.8. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of load
shifting equipment and storage facilities a.9. relevant Australian and international standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.10. communications technology equipment, oral, aural or signed
communications a.11. quality assurance standards and procedures a.12. emergency procedures a.13. relevant competency standards and training materials a.14. QA plans, data and document control a.15. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. codes and regulations relevant to workplace operations a.2. relevant Australian and international standards and certification
requirements a.3. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation in
terms of duties of employers, employees, suppliers and contractors a.4. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.5. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.6. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.7. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
138
Evidence Guide
MANAGE CHANGE PROCESSES WITHIN THE ORGANISATION
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. apply leadership skills when identifying opportunities to introduce
change in diverse/complex work environments a.2. manage work to achieve workplace goals and required results a.3. monitor trends in the external environment to develop and maintain a
competitive edge a.4. introduce and monitor practices to improve performance a.5. institute change management processes a.6. apply techniques to encourage appropriate participation of team/group
members in the continuous change and change management processes a.7. research, interpret and apply relevant information a.8. work effectively with others, seek feedback and act on constructive
advice a.9. maintain enterprise records and documentation a.10. apply the hierarchy of hazard control
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job role or function
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements relevant to workplace operations
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace procedures for the management of change processes within the
organisation d. Problems that may occur during the management of change processes
within an organisation and action that can be taken to resolve or report the problems
e. Risks and hazards related to the management of change processes within an organisation and ways of controlling the risks involved
f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: f.1. workplace business policies and plans f.2. focus of operation of work systems, resources, management and
workplace operating systems f.3. equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and
control mechanisms f.4. relevant regulatory, permit and licence requirements f.5. application of relevant Australian Standards and associated certification
requirements f.6. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.7. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.8. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills f.9. relevant workplace documentation procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
139
Evidence Guide (continued)
MANAGE CHANGE PROCESSES WITHIN THE ORGANISATION
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g. Ability to: g.1. strengthen and reinforce relationships within the workplace g.2. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to work activities g.3. read and interpret technical policies, regulations and instructions g.4. identify and solve problems that may arise when managing change
processes within an organisation g.5. provide leadership to others g.6. plan and organise activities g.7. select and apply appropriate technology, systems and procedures g.8. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to manage change processes within an organisation, and/or
a.2. manage change processes within an organisation in an appropriate range of operational warehousing, storage, transport and distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. applying leadership skills when identifying opportunities to introduce change in diverse/complex work environments
a.2. managing work to achieve workplace goals and required results a.3. monitoring trends in the external environment to develop and maintain a
competitive edge a.4. introducing and monitoring practices to improve performance a.5. instituting change management processes a.6. applying techniques to encourage appropriate participation of
team/group members in the continuous change and change management processes
a.7. researching, interpreting and applying relevant information a.8. working effectively with others, seeking feedback and acting on
constructive advice a.9. maintaining enterprise records and documentation a.10. applying the hierarchy of hazard control
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements
including local and international codes and regulations pertaining to workplace activities
b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures) c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
140
Evidence Guide (continued)
MANAGE CHANGE PROCESSES WITHIN THE ORGANISATION
5. Consistency in
performance d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified problems in
accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a
suitable range of contexts f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 2 3 2
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
141
TDTL1798B PLAN DOMESTIC TRANSPORT LOGISTICS Field L Resource Management DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to plan domestic transport logistics in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures, including planning efficient load handling arrangements, developing appropriate contingency management strategies, and producing the required operation schedules. Persons achieving competence in this unit will need to fulfil the requirements of all of the relevant State/Territory and Australian regulations and codes.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Plan efficient load handling
a. Capacity and capability of different transport modes available to the organisation are assessed against proposed task
b. Consignment loads are evaluated in terms of critical parameters c. Preliminary schedule is matched against operational capacity and capability of
equipment and staff d. Transport logistics are planned for efficient load handling in accordance with
regulatory and workplace requirements taking into account key requirements e. Strategies to address identified deficiencies in operational capability and
availability are undertaken in accordance with workplace procedures
2. Develop contingency management strategy
a. The nature, extent and impact of potential issues or incidents are assessed b. Contingency management strategies for identified issues/incidents are
generated and evaluated including reference to previous scenarios of similar nature
c. Implementation procedures, including resource and infrastructure support, are documented and continually upgraded in regards to changes in the operating environment
3. Produce operation
schedule a. Transportation modes, times and routes are established to maximise effective
and efficient operations b. Resources are allocated to meet the operational schedule c. Regulatory requirements, codes of practice and workplace procedures are
identified and accounted for in operational schedule d. Tracking procedures are applied to consignment(s) e. Schedule is consolidated and forwarded to appropriate personnel f. Schedule is stored in accordance with workplace procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
142
Range Of Variables
PLAN DOMESTIC TRANSPORT LOGISTICS
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the sections of the
warehousing, storage, transport and distribution industries involved in domestic transport logistics
b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site locations d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Critical parameters for the evaluation of consignment loads may include but are not limited to: e.1. type, capacity, compatibility and capability of load e.2. agreed delivery times and destination e.3. pick-up and drop-off points e.4. waiting, loading and unloading times
f. Key requirements for the planning of transport logistics may include but are not limited to: f.1. collection and distribution destination f.2. transport duration times f.3. type and compatibility of load f.4. transport mode(s) and capacity f.5. return freight f.6. fatigue management f.7. use of designated routes
g. Strategies to address identified deficiencies in operational capability and availability may include but are not limited to: g.1. re-negotiation of collection and/or delivery times g.2. alternate transport mode(s) g.3. outsourcing components of operation
h. Consignments may be palletised, containerised, packages or loose, and in gas, liquid or solid form
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
143
Range of Variables (continued)
PLAN DOMESTIC TRANSPORT LOGISTICS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Transport may be single or multi-modal j. Modes of domestic transport may include road, rail, air and sea k. Calculation of transport duration times includes travelling, loading, unloading,
change-over and standing times, and with due regard to varying transit condition and environments (i.e. road conditions, traffic flows, weather, local government by-laws)
l. Transport may involve the use of designated routes m. Requirements for work may include:
m.1. site restrictions and procedures m.2. use of safety and personal protection equipment m.3. systems and facilities for domestic transport logistics m.4. specialised lifting and/or handling equipment m.5. incident/accident breakdown procedures m.6. additional gear and equipment m.7. noise restrictions m.8. hours of operation m.9. authorities and permits m.10. communications equipment
n. Hazard management is consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before safe working practices and personal protective equipment
o. Consultative processes may involve: o.1. other employees and supervisors o.2. suppliers, potential customers and existing clients o.3. relevant authorities and institutions o.4. relevant government instrumentalities o.5. emergency services o.6. management and union representatives o.7. industrial relations and OHS specialists o.8. other maintenance, professional or technical staff
p. Communication in the work area may include: p.1. phone p.2. electronic data interchange (EDI) p.3. fax p.4. e-mail p.5. Internet p.6. RF communications p.7. bar code readers p.8. oral, aural or signed communications
q. Personal protection equipment may include but is not limited to: q.1. gloves q.2. safety headwear and footwear q.3. safety clothing q.4. safety glasses q.5. two-way radios q.6. high visibility clothing
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
144
Range of Variables (continued)
PLAN DOMESTIC TRANSPORT LOGISTICS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
r. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: r.1. company procedures r.2. enterprise procedures r.3. organisational procedures r.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Information/documentation may include: a.1. Australian codes of practice and regulations relevant to domestic
transport logistics including the ADG Code where applicable. a.2. workplace operating procedures and policies a.3. supplier and/or client instructions a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. manufacturer’s specifications for equipment and goods a.6. supplier's advice for the handling, transport and storage of goods and
materials a.7. material safety data sheets a.8. dangerous goods documentation where applicable including dangerous
goods declarations a.9. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of load shifting
equipment and storage facilities a.10. relevant Australian and bar code, criteria and certification requirements a.11. communications technology equipment, oral, aural or signed
communications a.12. quality assurance standards and procedures a.13. emergency procedures a.14. relevant competency standards and training materials a.15. QA plans, data and document control a.16. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. codes and regulations relevant to domestic transport logistics including
the ADG Code where applicable a.2. relevant Australian and international standards and certification
requirements a.3. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation in
terms of duties of employers, employees, suppliers and contractors a.4. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.5. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.6. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.7. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
145
Evidence Guide
PLAN DOMESTIC TRANSPORT LOGISTICS
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. apply leadership skills to the planning of transport logistic activities
including the allocation and delegation of tasks, taking into account development needs and workplace policy
a.2. manage own work to achieve workplace goals and required results a.3. suggest improvements to logistic operations and negotiate changes to
processes and operational schedules a.4. identify and implement transportation regulations and codes of practice a.5. compile operation schedules a.6. identify requirements of tasks and organise planning, job completion and
evaluation stages a.7. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.8. provide customer/client service and work effectively with others a.9. maintain enterprise records and documentation a.10. apply the hierarchy of hazard control
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job role or function
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements relevant to domestic transport logistics including the ADG Code where relevant
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace procedures for the planning of domestic transport logistics d. Problems that may occur during the planning of domestic transport logistics
and action that can be taken to resolve or report the problems e. Risks and hazards related to the planning of domestic transport logistics and
ways of controlling the risks involved f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include:
f.1. focus of operation of transport logistic systems, resources, management and workplace operating systems
f.2. transport and equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and control mechanisms
f.3. regulatory, licence and permit requirements relevant to domestic transport logistics
f.4. application of relevant Australian Standards and associated certification requirements
f.5. business policies and plans including procedures for outsourcing components of operations and engaging additional resources
f.6. workplace policies including issue resolution and grievance procedures f.7. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.8. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.9. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills f.10. relevant workplace documentation procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
146
Evidence Guide (continued)
PLAN DOMESTIC TRANSPORT LOGISTICS
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g. Ability to: g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to the planning
of domestic transport logistics activities g.2. read and interpret transport schedules, regulatory requirements,
customer instructions, workplace procedures and manuals g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the planning of
domestic transport logistics g.4. provide leadership to others g.5. plan and organise activities g.6. select and apply appropriate application of technology, information
systems and procedures g.7. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to plan domestic transport logistics, and/or
a.2. plan domestic transport logistics in an appropriate range of operational transport and distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. planning transport logistic activities a.2. managing own work to achieve workplace goals and required results a.3. suggesting improvements to logistic operations and negotiating changes
to processes and operational schedules a.4. identifying and implementing transportation regulations and codes of
practice a.5. compiling operation schedules a.6. identifying requirements of tasks and organising planning, job
completion and evaluation stages a.7. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information a.8. providing customer/client service and working effectively with others a.9. maintaining enterprise records and documentation a.10. applying the hierarchy of hazard control
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements
including local and international codes and regulations pertaining to the planning of domestic transport logistics
b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures) c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified incidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
147
Evidence Guide (continued)
PLAN DOMESTIC TRANSPORT LOGISTICS
5. Consistency in
performance e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a
suitable range of contexts f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 2 3 2 3 3 3
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
148
TDTL1898B SELECT EMPLOYEES Field L Resource Management DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to select employees in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures, including identifying future personnel requirements and assessing applicants in accordance with relevant equal employment opportunity and privacy regulations and workplace requirements.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Identify future personnel requirements
a. Policies in regard to staffing levels are identified b. Competencies and attitudes required of individuals for new and existing job
roles are identified c. Position specifications are drafted to reflect the required job role in relation to
workplace needs and in compliance with regulatory requirements d. Relevant parties are consulted prior to completing the specification e. Appropriate personnel are consulted to establish that estimates of personnel
needs are supported by workplace needs f. Position specifications are confirmed prior to recruitment action, incorporating
information on salaries, wages and conditions consistent with relevant awards/agreements, and legislative requirements
2. Assess
applicants a. Procedures with regard to staff recruitment are maintained and monitored
according to workplace policy and procedures and legislative requirements b. Job interviews and employment appraisals are conducted in accordance with
workplace procedures and legislative requirements c. Information obtained from each candidate is judged against specified selection
criteria, with additional influencing factors noted d. Advice is sought promptly from appropriate personnel as required e. Deviations from agreed procedures are identified and corrected before
selection decisions are made
3. Maintain records and documentation
a. Records are completed in accordance with workplace procedures b. Selection information and recommendations are communicated to authorised
personnel c. Confidentiality of process is maintained in accordance with regulatory
requirements and workplace procedures d. Candidates are promptly and accurately informed of selection decisions e. Recommendations for improvements to any aspect of the selection process
are communicated promptly to appropriate personnel
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
149
Range Of Variables
SELECT EMPLOYEES
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the warehousing,
storage, transport and distribution industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site locations d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Processes for job interviews and employment appraisals: e.1. are conducted in accordance with workplace policy e.2. must comply with equal opportunity and equal employment opportunity
legislation e.3. are based on workplace approved selection criteria and competencies
f. This unit applies to managers involved in selecting employees and managing performance within workplace policies and procedures
g. Workplace approved selection criteria may include: g.1. competencies required (including interpersonal skills) g.2. educational and training qualifications g.3. statutory certification/qualifications g.4. essential experience g.5. desired experience g.6. ability to work in a particular environment g.7. potential for growth
h. Consultative processes may involve: h.1. candidates h.2. other employees and supervisors h.3. management h.4. union representatives h.5. industrial relations and OHS specialists h.6. other maintenance, professional or technical staff
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
150
Range of Variables (continued)
SELECT EMPLOYEES
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Communication in the work area may include: i.1. phone i.2. electronic data interchange (EDI) i.3. fax i.4. e-mail i.5. Internet i.6. RF communications i.7. bar code readers i.8. oral, aural or signed communications
j. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: j.1. company procedures j.2. enterprise procedures j.3. organisational procedures j.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Information/documentation may include: a.1. codes of practice and regulations relevant to workplace operations and
staff selection processes a.2. workplace procedures and policies for the selection of staff a.3. relevant competency standards and training materials a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. manufacturer’s specifications for equipment and environmental control
systems a.6. relevant Australian and international standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.7. communications technology equipment, oral, aural or signed
communications a.8. quality and customer service standards, policies and procedures a.9. QA plans, data and document control a.10. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. relevant codes and regulations pertaining to workplace operations a.2. relevant Australian and international standards and certification
requirements a.3. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation in
terms of duties of employers, employees, suppliers and contractors a.4. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.5. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.6. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
151
Evidence Guide
SELECT EMPLOYEES
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. identify future staff requirements a.2. develop selection criteria a.3. select staff in accordance with regulatory requirements and workplace
procedures a.4. apply techniques to encourage appropriate participation of team/group
members and external organisations or individuals with relevant expertise in staff selection and performance management
a.5. locate, interpret and apply relevant information in relation to employees’ capacities
a.6. provide customer/client service and work effectively with others a.7. maintain workplace records and documentation
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job role or function
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements relevant to staff selection and workplace activities
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace procedures for the selection of staff d. Problems that may occur during the selection of staff and action that can be
taken to resolve or report the problems e. Risks and hazards related to the selection of staff and ways of controlling
the risks involved f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include:
f.1. business policies and plans including procedures for staffing, succession planning and recruitment
f.2. focus of operation of work systems, resources, management and workplace operating systems
f.3. current and future human resource requirements including the competencies needed within the team/group
f.4. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies within functional activity
f.5. equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and control mechanisms
f.6. relevant licence/permit requirements for workplace activities f.7. application of relevant Australian standards and associated certification
requirements f.8. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to
increase required knowledge and skills f.9. relevant workplace documentation procedures
g. Ability to: g.1. assess staff requirements for the completion of workplace activities g.2. develop selection criteria g.3. read and interpret job specifications, regulatory requirements and
procedures g.4. plan and organise staff selection activities g.5. interview candidates and interpret their responses
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
152
Evidence Guide (continued)
SELECT EMPLOYEES
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g.6. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to staff selection activities
g.7. identify and solve problems that may arise during the selection of staff g.8. provide leadership to others g.9. select and apply appropriate technology, information systems and
procedures g.10. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to select staff, and/or
a.2. select staff in an appropriate range of operational warehousing, storage, transport and distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. identifying future staff requirements a.2. developing selection criteria a.3. selecting staff in accordance with regulatory requirements and
workplace procedures a.4. applying techniques to encourage appropriate participation of
team/group members and external organisations or individuals with relevant expertise in staff selection
a.5. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information in relation to selection processes
a.6. providing customer/client service and working effectively with others a.7. maintaining workplace records and documentation
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements
pertaining to staff selection b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and privacy procedures) b.4. enterprise policies including issue resolution and grievance procedures b.5. use of consultative approaches to implement and evaluate staffing
arrangements c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
153
Evidence Guide (continued)
SELECT EMPLOYEES
6. Context for
assessment a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training
Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 2 2 1 2 2
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
154
TDTL1998B IMPLEMENT AND MONITOR TRANSPORT LOGISTICS Field L Resource Management DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to implement and monitor transport logistics in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures, including mobilising resources, coordinating multi-modal transport activities, monitoring consignment(s) tracking, and implementing a contingency management strategy. Persons achieving competence in this unit will need to fulfil the requirements of all of the relevant State/Territory, Australian and international regulations and codes.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Mobilise resources
a. Optimal resource level is acquired to meet the requirements of the operational schedule
b. Relevant regulatory and insurance requirements are determined and implemented
c. Allocated resources are assessed and monitored to ensure operational effectiveness and efficiency
d. Changes to resource allocation are undertaken (in accordance with enterprise procedures) where deficiencies or over-supply are apparent
2. Coordinate multi-
modal transport activities
a. Facilities, personnel and equipment are made ready to accommodate interchange functions
b. Security arrangements are invoked as required c. Loading and unloading operations are conducted in accordance with operation
schedule and applicable statutory requirements, codes of practice and enterprise procedures
d. Relevant documentation is completed/updated to accord with operational schedule and reporting requirements
3. Monitor
consignment(s) tracking
a. Consignment tracking systems are monitored against workplace quality standards
b. Variations from workplace quality standards are identified and appropriate action is initiated to rectify the identified problems or to institute any required improvements
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
155
4. Implement contingency management strategy
a. Operational schedule is continually reviewed in light of information updates, reports and feedback
b. The nature, extent and impact of any issues or incidents are identified and assessed against contingency management strategy
c. Relevant information is processed to establish priorities and responses for dealing with issues or incidents
d. Operations are redirected and controlled to meet changes in transport environment and tasks in accordance with enterprise procedures
e. Liaison is initiated and maintained with organisations/individuals affected by changed operational schedules
f. Actions undertaken are clearly documented and filed
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
156
Range Of Variables
IMPLEMENT AND MONITOR TRANSPORT LOGISTICS
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the sections of the
warehousing, storage, transport and distribution industries involved in transport logistics
b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site locations d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Critical parameters for the evaluation of consignment loads may include but are not limited to: e.1. type, capacity, compatibility and capability of load e.2. agreed delivery times and destination e.3. pick-up and drop-off points e.4. waiting, loading and unloading times
f. Key requirements for the planning of transport logistics may include but are not limited to: f.1. collection and distribution destination f.2. transport duration times f.3. type and compatibility of load f.4. transport mode(s) and capacity f.5. return freight f.6. fatigue management f.7. use of designated routes
g. Strategies to address identified deficiencies in operational capability and availability may include but are not limited to: g.1. re-negotiation of collection and/or delivery times g.2. alternate transport mode(s) g.3. outsourcing components of operation
h. Consignments may be palletised, containerised, packages or loose, and in gas, liquid or solid form
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
157
Range of Variables (continued)
IMPLEMENT AND MONITOR TRANSPORT LOGISTICS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Transport may be single or multi-modal j. Modes of transport may include road, rail, air and sea k. Calculation of transport duration times includes travelling, loading, unloading,
change-over and standing times and with due regard to varying transit condition and environments (i.e. road conditions, traffic flows, weather, local government by-laws)
l. Transport may involve the use of designated routes m. Requirements for work may include:
m.1. site restrictions and procedures m.2. use of safety and personal protection equipment m.3. systems and facilities for transport logistics m.4. specialised lifting and/or handling equipment m.5. incident/accident breakdown procedures m.6. additional gear and equipment m.7. noise restrictions m.8. hours of operation m.9. authorities and permits m.10. communications equipment
n. Hazard management is consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before safe working practices and personal protective equipment
o. Consultative processes may involve: o.1. other employees and supervisors o.2. suppliers, potential customers and existing clients o.3. relevant authorities and institutions o.4. relevant government instrumentalities o.5. emergency services o.6. management and union representatives o.7. industrial relations and OHS specialists o.8. other maintenance, professional or technical staff
p. Communication in the work area may include: p.1. phone p.2. electronic data interchange (EDI) p.3. fax p.4. e-mail p.5. Internet p.6. RF communications p.7. bar code readers p.8. oral, aural or signed communications
q. Personal protection equipment may include but is not limited to: q.1. gloves q.2. safety headwear and footwear q.3. safety clothing q.4. safety glasses q.5. two-way radios q.6. high visibility clothing
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
158
Range of Variables (continued)
IMPLEMENT AND MONITOR TRANSPORT LOGISTICS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
r. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: r.1. company procedures r.2. enterprise procedures r.3. organisational procedures r.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Information/documentation may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant
transport logistics including the ADG Code where applicable a.2. workplace operating procedures and policies a.3. supplier and/or client instructions a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. transport routes and timetables a.6. manufacturer’s specifications for equipment and goods a.7. supplier's advice a.8. material safety data sheets a.9. dangerous goods documentation where applicable including dangerous
goods declarations a.10. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of load
shifting equipment and storage facilities a.11. communications technology equipment, oral, aural or signed
communications a.12. quality assurance standards and procedures a.13. emergency procedures a.14. relevant competency standards and training materials a.15. relevant Australian and international standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.16. QA plans, data and document control a.17. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable regulations and legislation may include: a.1. codes and regulations relevant to transport logistics a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, a.3. relevant Australian and international standards and certification
requirements a.4. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.5. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation a.6. workplace relations regulations a.7. workers compensation regulations a.8. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
159
Evidence Guide
IMPLEMENT AND MONITOR TRANSPORT LOGISTICS
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. apply leadership skills to the implementation and monitoring of transport
logistic activities including the allocation and delegation of tasks, taking into account development needs and workplace policy
a.2. mobilise resources a.3. coordinate multi-modal transport activities a.4. monitor consignment(s) tracking a.5. implement contingency management strategy a.6. manage own work to achieve workplace goals and required results a.7. identify and implement relevant transportation regulations and codes of
practice a.8. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.9. provide customer/client service and work effectively with others a.10. maintain workplace records and documentation
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job role or function
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international regulations relevant to transport logistics
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace procedures for the implementation and monitoring of transport
logistics d. Problems that may occur during the implementation and monitoring of
transport logistics and action that can be taken to resolve or report the problems
e. Risks and hazards related to the implementation and monitoring of transport logistics and ways of controlling the risks involved
f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: f.1. focus of operation of transport logistic systems, resources, management
and workplace operating systems f.2. transport and equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety
hazards and control mechanisms f.3. code, regulatory, permit and licence requirements relevant to transport
logistics f.4. application of relevant Australian standards and associated certification
requirements f.5. business policies and plans including procedures for outsourcing
components of operations and engaging additional resources f.6. workplace policies including issue resolution and grievance procedures f.7. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.8. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.9. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills f.10. relevant workplace documentation procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
160
Evidence Guide (continued)
IMPLEMENT AND MONITOR TRANSPORT LOGISTICS
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g. Ability to: g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to transport
logistics activities g.2. read and interpret transport schedules, regulatory requirements,
customer instructions, workplace procedures and manuals g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the implementation
and monitoring of transport logistics g.4. provide leadership to others g.5. implement and monitor activities g.6. select and apply appropriate application of technology, information
systems and procedures g.7. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to implement and monitor transport logistics, and/or
a.2. implement and monitor transport logistics in an appropriate range of operational transport and distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. implementing and monitoring transport logistic activities a.2. mobilising required resources a.3. coordinating multi-modal transport activities a.4. monitoring consignment(s) tracking a.5. implementing contingency management strategy a.6. managing own work to achieve workplace goals and required results a.7. identifying and implementing relevant transportation regulations and
codes of practice a.8. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information a.9. providing customer/client service and working effectively with others a.10. maintaining workplace records and documentation
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements
including local and international codes and regulations pertaining to the implementation and monitoring of transport logistics
b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures) c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified incidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
161
Evidence Guide (continued)
IMPLEMENT AND MONITOR TRANSPORT LOGISTICS
5. Consistency in
performance e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a
suitable range of contexts f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 2 3 2 3 3 3
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
162
TDTL2098B DEVELOP AND MAINTAIN OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES FOR TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION ENTERPRISES
Field L Resource Management DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to develop and maintain operational procedures for transport and distribution enterprises in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures, including planning and developing operational procedures, monitoring the implementation of the operational procedure(s), and evaluating the implementation of operational procedures. Persons achieving competence in this unit will need to fulfil the requirements of all of the relevant State/Territory, Australian and international regulations and codes.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Plan and develop operational procedures
a. Processes requiring development/modification of operational procedures are identified and confirmed with relevant personnel and business units
b. The scope, focus and extent of the operational procedure(s) are discussed and validated with effected personal
c. Current procedures are evaluated to ensure development is not unnecessarily duplicating previous work
d. Factors likely to impact upon the development process are identified and techniques adopted for their incorporation into the procedure(s)
e. The proposed operational procedures are researched from a range of sources and include provision for user input
f. Operational procedures are developed, documented and verified with relevant internal/external personnel and/or organisations in accordance with workplace procedures
g. Where required, trialing of new operational procedures is undertaken with a target group
h. Performance indicators are developed to measure the effectiveness of the operational procedure(s)
2. Monitor the
implementation of the operational procedure(s)
a. The introduction of the operational procedure(s) to selected units/job functions is planned with affected personnel to ensure understanding and the need for compliance
b. Effective induction and supervision is provided to support personnel in implementing the new procedure(s)
c. Performance of personnel is monitored to ensure adherence to the operational procedure(s) and to assess the requirement for modification to the process
d. Solicited feedback is actively sought from personnel implementing the operational procedure(s)
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
163
3. Evaluate the implementation of operational procedures
a. An assessment of the effectiveness of the operational procedure(s) is undertaken against developed performance indicators
b. Where required, the operational procedure(s) are modified/deleted in accordance with evaluation mechanism and enterprise requirements
c. Relevant personnel are kept informed of the evaluation process and advised of subsequent changes to operational procedure(s)
d. Records, reports and recommendations for improvement are managed within the workplace information systems and processes
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
164
Range Of Variables DEVELOP AND MAINTAIN OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES FOR TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION ENTERPRISES VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in warehousing,
storage, transport and distribution industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site locations d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Factors impacting upon the development of operational procedures may include: e.1. legislative requirements e.2. changes to technology e.3. domestic and international market variability, political constraints e.4. culture of the workplace e.5. the principal services, products and competitive advantages of the
organisation f. Development of operational procedures may be internally and/or externally
initiated g. Transport may be single or multi-modal h. Modes of domestic transport may include road, rail, air and sea i. Transport may involve the use of designated routes j. Hazards may include:
j.1. confined spaces j.2. hazardous or dangerous materials j.3. contamination of, or from, materials being handled j.4. fire/explosions j.5. noise, light, energy sources j.6. stationary and moving machinery, parts or components j.7. moving vehicles
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
165
Range of Variables (continued) DEVELOP AND MAINTAIN OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES FOR TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION ENTERPRISES VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
k. Hazard management is consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before safe working practices and personal protective equipment
l. Requirements for work may include: l.1. site restrictions and procedures l.2. use of safety and personal protection equipment l.3. systems and facilities for transport and distribution systems l.4. specialised lifting and/or handling equipment l.5. incident/accident breakdown procedures l.6. additional gear and equipment l.7. noise restrictions l.8. hours of operation l.9. authorities and permits l.10. communications equipment
m. Consultative processes may involve: m.1. other employees and supervisors m.2. suppliers, potential customers and existing clients m.3. relevant authorities and institutions m.4. relevant government instrumentalities m.5. emergency services m.6. management and union representatives m.7. industrial relations and OHS specialists m.8. other maintenance, professional or technical staff
n. Communication in the work area may include: n.1. phone n.2. electronic data interchange (EDI) n.3. fax n.4. e-mail n.5. Internet n.6. RF communications n.7. bar code readers n.8. oral, aural or signed communications
o. Personal protection equipment may include but is not limited to: o.1. gloves o.2. safety headwear and footwear o.3. safety clothing o.4. safety glasses o.5. two-way radios o.6. high visibility clothing
p. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: p.1. company procedures p.2. enterprise procedures p.3. organisational procedures p.4. established procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
166
Range of Variables (continued) DEVELOP AND MAINTAIN OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES FOR TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION ENTERPRISES VARIABLE SCOPE
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Information/documentation may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
transport and distribution operations including the ADG Code where applicable
a.2. workplace operating procedures and policies a.3. supplier and/or client instructions a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. manufacturer’s specifications for equipment and goods a.6. supplier's advice for the handling, transport and storage of goods and
materials a.7. material safety data sheets a.8. dangerous goods documentation where applicable including dangerous
goods declarations a.9. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of load shifting
equipment and storage facilities a.10. relevant Australian and international standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.11. communications technology equipment, oral, aural or signed
communications a.12. quality assurance standards and procedures a.13. emergency procedures a.14. relevant competency standards and training materials a.15. QA plans, data and document control a.16. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. codes and regulations relevant to transport and distribution operations
including the ADG Code where applicable a.2. relevant Australian and international standards and certification
requirements a.3. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation in
terms of duties of employers, employees, suppliers and contractors a.4. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.5. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.6. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.7. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
167
Evidence Guide DEVELOP AND MAINTAIN OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES FOR TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION ENTERPRISES 1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. assess the need for the development of operational procedures a.2. develop accurate and applicable operational procedures a.3. utilise a range of relevant resources to inform the development process a.4. suggest improvements to workplace operations and negotiate changes
to current workplace practice a.5. apply techniques to encourage appropriate participation of team/group
members and external organisations in developing and improving operational procedures
a.6. encourage ideas and feedback to improve processes and gain commitment from individuals/teams
a.7. research, interpret and apply relevant information a.8. coordinate customer/client service and work effectively with others a.9. maintain enterprise records and documentation a.10. apply the hierarchy of hazard control
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job role or function
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international regulations relevant to transport and distribution operations and the ADG Code where applicable
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace procedures for the development and maintenance of operational
procedures for transport and distribution enterprises d. Problems that may occur during the development and maintenance of
operational procedures for transport and distribution enterprises and action that can be taken to resolve or report the problems
e. Risks and hazards related to the development and maintenance of operational procedures and ways of controlling the risks involved
f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: f.1. focus of operation of transport and distribution systems, resources,
management and workplace operating systems f.2. transport and equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety
hazards and control mechanisms f.3. regulatory, licence and permit requirements relevant to transport and
distribution operations f.4. application of relevant Australian standards and associated certification
requirements f.5. business policies and plans including procedures for outsourcing
components of operations and engaging additional resources f.6. workplace policies including issue resolution and grievance procedures f.7. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.8. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.9. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills f.10. relevant workplace documentation procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
168
Evidence Guide (continued) DEVELOP AND MAINTAIN OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES FOR TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION ENTERPRISES 3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g. Ability to: g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to transport and
distribution operations g.2. read and interpret transport and distribution schedules, inventories,
regulatory requirements, customer instructions, workplace procedures and manuals
g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the development and maintenance of operational procedures for transport and distribution enterprises
g.4. provide leadership to others g.5. plan and organise activities g.6. select and apply appropriate application of technology, information
systems and procedures g.7. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to develop and maintain operational procedures for transport and distribution enterprises, and/or
a.2. develop and maintain operational procedures in an appropriate range of operational transport and distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. assessing the need for the development of operational procedures a.2. developing operational procedures a.3. suggesting improvements to workplace operations and negotiating
changes to current workplace practice a.4. applying techniques to encourage appropriate participation of
team/group members and external organisations in developing and improving operational procedures
a.5. encouraging ideas and feedback to improve processes and gain commitment from individuals/teams
a.6. researching, interpreting and applying relevant information a.7. coordinating customer/client service and working effectively with others a.8. maintaining enterprise records and documentation
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements
including local and international codes and regulations pertaining to transport and distribution operations
b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures) c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified incidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
169
Evidence Guide (continued) DEVELOP AND MAINTAIN OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES FOR TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION ENTERPRISES 5. Consistency in
performance e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a
suitable range of contexts f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 2 3 2
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
170
TDTL2601A MANAGE EXPORT LOGISTICS Field L Resource Management DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to manage export logistics in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures, including planning efficient export logistics operations, developing appropriate contingency management strategies, producing the required operation schedules for export logistics, and monitoring and coordinating the required systems for export logistics. Persons achieving competence in this unit will need to fulfil the requirements of all of the relevant State/Territory, Australian and international regulations and codes.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Plan efficient export logistics
a. Australian and international codes and regulations and workplace policies for export logistics are identified
b. Consignment loads are evaluated in terms of critical parameters and customer instructions
c. Capacity and capability of different local and overseas transport modes available to the organisation are assessed against proposed logistics tasks
d. Preliminary schedules are matched against operational capacity and capability of available transport systems, equipment and staff
e. Export logistics are planned for efficient and effective delivery and load handling in accordance with relevant regulatory and workplace procedures, taking into account key requirements
f. Strategies to address identified deficiencies in operational capability and availability are undertaken in accordance with workplace procedures
2. Develop contingency management strategy
a. Quality standards and procedures for export logistics processes are confirmed and/or updated in accordance with workplace procedures
b. The nature, extent and impact of potential issues or incidents in the planned export logistics are assessed
c. Contingency management strategies for identified issues/incidents are established and evaluated including reference to previous scenarios of similar nature
d. Implementation procedures, including resource and infrastructure support, are documented and continually upgraded in regards to established quality standards and any changes in both the Australian and the international operating environments
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
171
3. Produce operation schedules for export logistics
a. Local and overseas transportation modes, times and routes are established to maximise effective and efficient operations
b. Resources are arranged in association with relevant Australian and overseas personnel to meet the operational schedules
c. Australian and international regulatory requirements, codes of practice and workplace procedures are identified and accounted for in operational schedule
d. Tracking procedures are applied to consignment(s) using relevant technology and systems in accordance with workplace procedures
e. Schedule is consolidated and forwarded to appropriate personnel f. Schedule is stored in accordance with workplace procedures
4. Monitor and coordinate systems for export logistics
a. Export logistics are monitored against identified quality standards, planned processes, and compliance with Australian and international regulatory requirements
b. Non-compliance with quality standards, planned processes or regulatory requirements is identified and appropriate action is initiated to report and rectify any identified problems
c. Customer satisfaction with export logistics operations is monitored using appropriate methods
d. Customer concerns and suggestions for service improvements are acted upon in accordance with workplace procedures
e. Reports and other required documentation related to export logistics are completed and referred to relevant personnel in accordance with workplace procedures
f. Any changes in Australian and international regulations and codes of practice relevant to export logistics are monitored, identified and appropriate action is initiated to ensure ongoing compliance of export logistics processes and systems
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
172
Range Of Variables
MANAGE EXPORT LOGISTICS
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice, including Australian and International Dangerous Goods Codes
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the sections of the
warehousing, storage, transport and distribution industries involved in export logistics
b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site locations d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Critical parameters for the evaluation of consignment loads may include but are not limited to: e.1. type, capacity, compatibility and capability of load e.2. agreed delivery times and destination e.3. pick-up and drop-off points e.4. waiting, loading and unloading times e.5. agreed cost structure
f. Key requirements for the planning of transport logistics may include but are not limited to: f.1. collection and distribution destination f.2. transport duration times f.3. type and compatibility of load f.4. transport mode(s) and capacity f.5. bond and customs requirements f.6. return freight f.7. fatigue management f.8. use of designated routes
g. Strategies to address identified deficiencies in operational capability and availability may include but are not limited to: g.1. re-negotiation of collection and/or delivery times g.2. alternate transport mode(s) g.3. outsourcing components of operation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
173
Range of Variables (continued)
MANAGE EXPORT LOGISTICS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
h. Consignments may be palletised, containerised, packages or loose, and in gas, liquid or solid form
i. Transport may be single or multi-modal j. Modes of export may include road, rail, air, sea and both local and overseas
couriers k. Calculation of transport duration times includes travelling, loading, unloading,
change-over and standing times and with due regard to varying transit condition and environments (i.e. local and overseas road, sea and weather conditions, traffic flows, government regulations)
l. Transport may involve the use of designated routes m. Requirements for work may include:
m.1. site restrictions and procedures m.2. use of safety and personal protection equipment m.3. systems and facilities for export logistics m.4. specialised lifting and/or handling equipment m.5. incident/accident breakdown procedures m.6. additional gear and equipment m.7. noise restrictions m.8. hours of operation Australian and overseas contacts m.9. authorities and permits m.10. communications/computing equipment
n. Hazards may include: n.1. confined spaces n.2. hazardous or dangerous materials n.3. contamination of, or from, materials being handled/transported n.4. fire/explosions n.5. noise, light, energy sources n.6. stationary and moving machinery, parts or components n.7. moving vehicles
o. Hazard management is consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before safe working practices and personal protective equipment
p. Consultative processes may involve: p.1. employees, supervisors and managers p.2. international and domestic agents, suppliers and current or potential
clients p.3. relevant authorities, government departments and institutions p.4. representatives of other enterprises and organisations involved in export
logistics p.5. industrial relations and OHS specialists p.6. other professional or technical staff
q. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: q.1. company procedures q.2. enterprise procedures q.3. organisational procedures q.4. established procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
174
Range of Variables (continued)
MANAGE EXPORT LOGISTICS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
r. Communication in the work area may include: r.1. phone r.2. electronic data interchange (EDI) r.3. fax r.4. e-mail r.5. Internet r.6. RF communications r.7. bar code readers r.8. oral, aural or signed communications
s. Personal protection equipment may include but is not limited to: s.1. gloves s.2. safety headwear and footwear s.3. safety clothing s.4. safety glasses s.5. two-way radios s.6. high visibility clothing
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Information/documentation may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
export logistics including bond and customs requirements a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including the ADG and IDG Code
a.3. workplace operating procedures and policies relevant to export logistics a.4. supplier and/or client instructions a.5. agents' advice on available transport options, timetables, schedules and
issues a.6. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.7. manufacturer’s specifications for equipment and goods a.8. supplier's advice for the handling, transport and storage of goods and
materials a.9. material safety data sheets a.10. dangerous goods documentation where applicable including dangerous
goods declarations a.11. relevant Australian and international standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.12. information accessed through communications/computer technology and
equipment, and verbal or signed communications a.13. quality assurance standards and procedures a.14. emergency procedures a.15. relevant competency standards and training materials a.16. QA plans, data and document control a.17. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
175
Range of Variables (continued)
MANAGE EXPORT LOGISTICS
VARIABLE SCOPE
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable regulations and legislation may include: a.1. Australian and international codes and regulations relevant to export
logistics a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including: a.2.1. Australian and International Dangerous Goods Codes a.2.2. Australian Marine Orders and the International Maritime
Dangerous Goods Code a.2.3. IATA's 'Dangerous Goods by Air' regulations a.2.4. Australian and International Explosives Codes
a.3. relevant Australian and international standards and certification requirements
a.4. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.5. transport licence/permit requirements a.6. export/import/quarantine/bond requirements a.7. Marine/Aviation Orders a.8. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation a.9. workplace relations regulations a.10. workers compensation regulations a.11. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
176
Evidence Guide
MANAGE EXPORT LOGISTICS
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. apply leadership skills to the planning and coordination of export
logistics a.2. manage own export contracts to achieve workplace goals and required
results a.3. suggest improvements to export logistics operations and negotiate
changes to processes and operational schedules a.4. identify and implement Australian and international transportation
regulations and codes of practice a.5. compile operation schedules a.6. identify requirements of tasks and organise planning, job completion and
evaluation stages a.7. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.8. provide customer/client service and work effectively with others both
locally and overseas a.9. maintain enterprise records and documentation a.10. apply the hierarchy of hazard control
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job role or function
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international regulations relevant to export logistics
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace procedures for the planning and management of export logistics d. Problems that may occur during the planning and management of export
logistics and action that can be taken to resolve or report the problems e. Risks and hazards related to the planning and management of export
logistics and ways of controlling the risks involved f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include:
f.1. focus of operation of export logistics systems, resources, management and workplace operating systems
f.2. local and overseas transport and equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and control mechanisms
f.3. Australian and international regulatory, permit and licence requirements relevant to export logistics
f.4. application of relevant Australian and international standards and associated certification requirements
f.5. business policies and plans including procedures for outsourcing components of operations and engaging additional resources
f.6. workplace policies including issue resolution and grievance procedures f.7. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.8. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.9. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills f.10. workplace documentation procedures relevant to export logistics
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
177
Evidence Guide (continued)
MANAGE EXPORT LOGISTICS
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g. Ability to: g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to export
logistics activities g.2. read and interpret local and international transport schedules, regulatory
requirements, customer instructions, and workplace procedures and manuals
g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the planning and management of export logistics
g.4. provide leadership to others g.5. plan and organise export logistics g.6. select and apply appropriate application of technology, information and
communication systems and procedures g.7. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to plan and manage export logistics, and/or
a.2. plan and manage export logistics in an appropriate range of operational transport and distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. planning transport logistic activities a.2. managing own export contracts to achieve workplace goals and required
results a.3. suggesting improvements to export logistics operations and negotiating
changes to processes and operational schedules a.4. identifying and implementing Australian and international transportation
regulations and codes of practice a.5. compiling operation schedules a.6. identifying requirements of tasks and organising planning, job
completion and evaluation stages a.7. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information a.8. providing customer/client service and working effectively with others a.9. maintaining workplace records and documentation a.10. applying the hierarchy of hazard control
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements
including local and international codes and regulations pertaining to the planning and management of export logistics
b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures) c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified incidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
178
Evidence Guide (continued)
MANAGE EXPORT LOGISTICS
5. Consistency in
performance e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a
suitable range of contexts f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
179
BSBMGT502A MANAGE PEOPLE PERFORMANCE Field L Resource Management DESCRIPTION: This unit covers the skills and knowledge required by managers to manage the performance of the staff who report to them directly. Development of key result areas and key performance indicators and standards, coupled with regular and timely coaching and feedback, provide the basis for performance management. It is a unit that all managers/prospective managers who have responsibility for other employees should strongly consider undertaking. This unit is identical to the Business Services unit of the same code but has been reformatted into the ANTA approved TDT Training Package format.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Allocate work
a. Relevant groups and individuals are consulted on work to be allocated and resources to be deployed
b. Work is allocated in accordance with operational plans c. Allocation of work is cost effective and appropriate in terms of the use of
internal/external labour d. Performance standards, Code of Conduct and work outputs and processes are
confirmed prior to commencement e. Performance indicators are developed for key result areas and are agreed
prior to commencement of work f. Risk analyses are undertaken in accordance with the organisational risk
management plan and legal requirements
2. Assess performance
a. Performance management and review processes are designed to be consistent with organisational objectives and policies
b. Participants in the performance management and review process are trained c. Performance management processes are implemented in accordance with
planning and timelines d. Performance is monitored and evaluated on a continuous basis
3. Provide feedback
a. Informal feedback is given in a regular, timely manner b. Poor performance is identified promptly and brought to the attention of the
appropriate person c. On-the-job coaching is provided when necessary, both to improve performance
and confirm excellence in performance d. Documentation of performance is in accordance with the performance
management system e. Formal structured feedback sessions occur as necessary and in accordance
with organisational policy
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
180
4. Manage follow-up
a. Performance improvement and development plans are developed in accordance with organisational policies
b. Assistance is sought from human resource specialists where appropriate c. Excellence in performance is reinforced through recognition and continuous
feedback d. Individuals not meeting expectations are provided with the necessary coaching
and re-training and monitored closely e. Support services are provided to meet individual needs and circumstances f. Individuals who continue to perform below expectations are counselled and,
where necessary, placed within the disciplinary process g. Terminations occur where serious misconduct or ongoing under-performance
occurs h. Terminations are in accordance with organisational and legal requirements i. Performance feedback systems are evaluated regularly and revised as
necessary j. Selection, induction and training systems are evaluated regularly and improved
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
181
Range Of Variables
MANAGE PEOPLE PERFORMANCE
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and codes of practice
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and
using resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Key result areas means those areas of business performance which are
critical to the overall success of the business (or section of a business) b. Key performance indicators means those measures developed to gauge
performance outcomes against targets c. Performance standards means the level of performance sought of an
individual or group which may be expressed either quantitatively or qualitatively
d. Code of Conduct means an agreed (or decreed) set of rules relating to employee behaviour/conduct with other employees or customers
e. Risk analysis means a determination of the likelihood of a negative event preventing the organisation meeting its objectives and the likely consequences of such an event on organisational performance
f. Performance management means a process or set of processes for establishing a shared understanding of what an individual or group is to achieve, and managing and developing individuals in a way which increases the probability it will be achieved in both the short and longer term in accordance with relevant industrial agreements
g. Excellence in performance means regularly and consistently exceeding the performance targets established whilst meeting the organisation's performance standards
h. Coaching refers to informal on-the-job and off-the-job advice and training to improve performance
i. Termination means a cessation of the contract of employment between an employer and an employee, at the initiative of the employer within relevant industrial agreements
j. Relevant groups and individuals include: j.1. employees j.2. employee representatives j.3. employer representatives j.4. line managers j.5. human resource personnel
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
182
Range Of Variables (continued)
MANAGE PEOPLE PERFORMANCE
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
k. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: k.1. company procedures k.2. enterprise procedures k.3. organisational procedures k.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Information/documents may include: a.1. organisational policy manuals a.2. induction documentation a.3. competency standards and training materials a.4. manufacturer’s specifications for relevant equipment a.5. workplace procedures and policies for the management of people
performance a.6. award, enterprise bargaining agreement, other industrial arrangements a.7. standards and certification requirements a.8. customer service and quality assurance standards and procedures a.9. emergency procedures
4. Applicable
regulations and legislation
a. Legislation, codes and national standards relevant to the workplace which may include: a.1. award and enterprise agreements and relevant industrial instruments a.2. relevant legislation from all levels of government that affects business
operation, especially in regard to Occupational Health and Safety and environmental issues, equal opportunity, industrial relations and anti-discrimination
a.3. relevant industry codes of practice
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
183
Evidence Guide
MANAGE PEOPLE PERFORMANCE
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. allocate work in accordance with workplace procedures and policies a.2. assess employee performance against performance standards a.3. carry out workplace coaching (informal feedback) a.4. provide formal performance feedback, resulting in performance
improvement a.5. establish and maintain OHS training, records and induction processes a.6. assess and provide feedback on performance against OHS legislation
and an organisation's OHS system, especially policies, procedures and work instructions
2. Interdependent
assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a manager's job function
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. At this level, the learner must demonstrate understanding of a broad knowledge base incorporating theoretical concepts, with substantial depth in some areas
b. Relevant legislation from all levels of government that affects business operation, especially in regard to Occupational Health and Safety and environmental issues, equal opportunity, industrial relations and anti-discrimination
c. Relevant awards and certified agreements d. Performance measurement systems utilised within the organisation e. Key result areas of the organisation f. Human resource specialist assistance available g. Organisational plans and objectives (strategic, tactical and operational) h. Human resource planning policies and procedures i. All legislation relevant to the organisation which impacts on people
performance (including EEO and anti-discrimination laws) j. Organisational support services for employees (external and internal) k. Unfair dismissal rules and due process l. Staff development strategies m. Ability to:
m.1. communicate/consult with others to ensure all relevant groups and individuals are advised of what is occurring and are provided with an opportunity for input
m.2. relate to people from a range of social, cultural and ethnic backgrounds and physical and mental abilities
m.3. apply performance measurement skills to develop and manage key performance indicators
m.4. apply risk management skills to analyse, identify and develop mitigation strategies for identified risks
m.5. use coaching and training skills to remediate any under-performance present in the work group or individuals
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
184
Evidence Guide (continued)
MANAGE PEOPLE PERFORMANCE
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
m.6. apply counselling/interviewing skills when conducting formal performance feedback sessions including counselling and disciplinary interviews where required
m.7. use evaluative skills to review and improve performance management systems
4. Resource
implications a. Access is required to opportunities to:
a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real and simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to manage people performance, and/or
a.2. manage people performance in an appropriate range of management contexts
b. The learner and trainer should have access to appropriate documentation and resources normally used in the workplace
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. managing work to achieve desired required outcomes a.2. operating within budget(s) a.3. identifying means to improve service to customers a.4. consulting appropriately to introduce (any) required improvements to
customer service provision a.5. using information management systems a.6. providing customer/client service and working effectively with colleagues a.7. adapting customer service implementation systems to particular
purposes a.8. supporting group members to implement improved customer service
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant legislation and regulations b.2. OHS regulations and hazard prevention policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and work instructions related to the management
of people performance b.4. relevant guidelines relating to the use of required equipment b.5. housekeeping procedures b.6. environmental protection procedures
c. Action is taken promptly to respond to and/or report any personnel problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
d. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
e. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace, including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
185
Evidence Guide (continued)
MANAGE PEOPLE PERFORMANCE
6. Context for
assessment a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training
Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. at the Registered Training Organisation, and/or a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
b. Competency is demonstrated by performance of all stated criteria, including paying particular attention to the critical aspects and the knowledge and skills elaborated in the Evidence Guide, and within the scope as defined by the Range Statement.
c. Assessment must take account of the endorsed assessment guidelines in the Business Services Training Package.
d. Assessment of performance requirements in this unit should be undertaken in an actual workplace or simulated environment.
e. Assessment should reinforce the integration of the key competencies and the business services common competencies for the particular AQF level. Refer to the Key Competency Levels at the end of this unit.
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 3 3 2
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
186
TDTO598B PLAN AND MANAGE SECURITY PROCEDURES FOR THE ENTERPRISE Field O Security DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to plan and manage security procedures for the workplace in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures, including assessing security risks, specifying security requirements, implementing the security plan, and monitoring and reviewing the system performance.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Assess security risks
a. Records of security breaches, thefts and damage are reviewed to identify past security incidents
b. Assessment of potential risks to the security of stock, personnel, facilities, information and equipment are made, considering both internal and external factors
c. Relative risks from a range of sources are assessed and compared with existing security measures
d. Discrepancies between identified risk and current security processes are noted
2. Specify security requirements
a. Decisions and adjustments to security equipment, facilities and services are made based on risk assessment in relation to benefits to the organisation
b. Security organisational arrangements are documented and implementation strategies are established
c. A finalised security plan including performance indicators is prepared in accordance with workplace requirements and circulated for feedback prior to implementation
d. Questions and feedback from stakeholders are responded to promptly and, where appropriate, incorporated in the plan
3. Implement security
plan a. Priorities for implementation are identified and management and workplace
personnel are informed b. Competency needs for the work are identified and staff allocated and/or trained
and assessed to meet those needs c. Equipment and facilities are allocated and/or obtained d. Workplace personnel and equipment are organised to meet requirements
ensuring that work loads are balanced and other workplace activities are met e. Workplace security policies and procedures are amended and trialed to
improve performance f. Operating procedures and methods are explained to workplace personnel and
follow-up communication methods are used to ensure that work requirements are applied
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
187
4. Monitor and review system performance
a. Security reports are collated and categorised b. Reports are compared to identify any trends in breaches c. Security procedures are modified to rectify any gaps identified
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
188
Range Of Variables
PLAN AND MANAGE SECURITY PROCEDURES FOR THE ENTERPRISE
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant Australian and international regulations, standards and codes of practice
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the warehousing,
storage, transport and distribution industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Security may be provided by internal or contract staff f. Security coding for the identification of assets may include:
f.1. stocktakes f.2. assets register (coded and labelled) f.3. monitoring insurance requirements
g. Regular insurance assessments may include: g.1. conditions of insurance g.2. insurance assessment of premises g.3. monitoring insurance requirements
h. Work organisation procedures and practices may include: h.1. financial/administrative procedures h.2. security procedures
i. Consultative processes may involve: i.1. internal and contract security staff i.2. police i.3. security consultants i.4. relevant authorities, government departments and institutions i.5. other employees and supervisors i.6. management i.7. industrial relations and OHS specialists i.8. other professional or technical staff
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
189
Range of Variables (continued)
PLAN AND MANAGE SECURITY PROCEDURES FOR THE ENTERPRISE
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
j. Communication in the work area may include: j.1. mobile and fixed phones j.2. radio j.3. oral, aural or signed communications j.4. fax j.5. email j.6. electronic data transfer of information j.7. mail
k. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: k.1. company procedures k.2. enterprise procedures k.3. organisational procedures k.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. codes of practice and regulations relevant to the planning and
management of security procedures a.2. workplace security procedures and policies a.3. insurance notes and information a.4. documentation of physical protection facilities a.5. security programs operations manuals, job specifications and procedures
and induction documentation a.6. supplier and/or client instructions a.7. Australian and International standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.8. communications technology equipment and/oral, aural or signed
communications a.9. quality assurance standards and procedures a.10. emergency procedures a.11. relevant competency standards and training materials a.12. QA plans, data and document control a.13. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice relevant to the planning and
management of security procedures a.2. relevant Australian Standards and certification requirements a.3. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation in
terms of duties of employers, employees, suppliers and contractors a.4. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.5. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.6. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.7. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
190
Evidence Guide
PLAN AND MANAGE SECURITY PROCEDURES FOR THE ENTERPRISE
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. apply leadership skills in the completion of security arrangements
including the allocation and delegation of tasks, taking into account task requirements, development needs and workplace policy
a.2. manage own work to achieve workplace goals and required results a.3. suggest improvements to security operations and negotiate changes a.4. mediate and resolve issues surrounding security arrangements,
maximising positive outcomes for the workplace and the individuals within it
a.5. identify requirements of security tasks and organise planning, job completion and evaluation stages
a.6. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.7. provide customer/client service and work effectively with others a.8. maintain workplace records and documentation a.9. communicate effectively with customers, staff and others on security
matters
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements relevant to the planning and management of security procedures within a workplace
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace procedures for the planning and management of security
procedures d. Problems that may occur during the planning and management of security
procedures for transport and distribution enterprises and action that can be taken to resolve or report the problems
e. Risks and hazards related to the planning and management of security procedures and ways of controlling the risks involved
f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: f.1. business policies for security provision, including out-sourcing of
components of operations and engaging additional resources f.2. focus of operation of security systems, resources, management and
workplace operating systems f.3. transport and equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety
hazards and control mechanisms f.4. regulatory, licence and permit requirements relevant to security
procedures f.5. relevant Australian Standards and certification requirements f.6. workplace policies including issue resolution and grievance procedures f.7. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.8. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.9. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills f.10. relevant workplace documentation procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
191
Evidence Guide (continued)
PLAN AND MANAGE SECURITY PROCEDURES FOR THE ENTERPRISE
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g. Ability to: g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to workplace
activities g.2. read and interpret operational data, regulatory requirements, instructions
and manuals g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the planning and
management of security procedures g.4. provide leadership to others g.5. plan and organise systems and activities g.6. select and apply appropriate technology, information systems and
procedures a.7. maintain workplace records and documentation g.8. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to plan and manage security procedures for the enterprise, and/or
a.2. plan and manage workplace security procedures in an appropriate range of operational transport, warehousing, storage and distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. applying leadership skills in the completion of security arrangements a.2. managing own work to achieve workplace goals and required results a.3. suggesting improvements to security operations and negotiating
changes a.4. mediating and resolving issues surrounding security arrangements a.5. identifying requirements of security tasks and organising, planning, job
completion and evaluation stages a.6. providing customer/client service and working effectively with others a.7. maintaining workplace records and documentation
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements b.2. OHS policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including security and
housekeeping procedures) b.4. issue resolution procedures b.5. standards and guidelines relating to the safe use of vehicles, machinery
and equipment b.6. environmental protection procedures
c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified incidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
192
Evidence Guide (continued)
PLAN AND MANAGE SECURITY PROCEDURES FOR THE ENTERPRISE
5. Consistency in
performance (continued)
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 2 3 3
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
193
TDTO698B PLAN AND MANAGE SECURITY PROCEDURES FOR TRANSFERRING AND TRANSPORTING DANGEROUS GOODS
Field O Security DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to plan and manage security procedures for transferring and transporting dangerous goods in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures, including the ADG Code. This includes clarifying the movements of hazardous or high risk goods; implementing procedures for loading, loading or goods movement activities; checking and monitoring personnel and goods within the work area; coordinating responses on security incidents/emergencies; carrying out surveillance of work areas; and reviewing and completing goods transfer operations in accordance with workplace requirements. Persons achieving competence in this unit will need to fulfil all of the relevant State/Territory regulations and codes concerning the transport of dangerous goods.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Clarify movements of hazardous or high risk goods
a. Transport schedule details, nature of risk, special precautions and procedures are planned with line managers, supervisory staff and loaders
b. Where applicable, appropriate permits and licences for transfer site/transport route are obtained/confirmed or exemptions sought
c. Potential risks or hazards are identified, assessed and processes planned to manage risk
d. Information collected is checked against workplace procedures and relevant regulatory framework
e. Activities requiring special approval or workplace procedure changes are authorised and/or approvals obtained
f. Security procedures are communicated to relevant parties
2. Implement procedures for loading, loading or goods movement activities
a. Advise is provided to relevant emergency response groups (internal and/or external) or other affected personnel or contractors
b. Procedures to control movement of equipment and personnel within the goods movement area in relation to the identified risks are initiated
c. Security procedures are monitored and maintained with action taken to modify procedures when necessary
d. Goods are moved within relevant enterprise procedures and statutory regulations
3. Check and monitor
personnel and goods within the work area
a. Personnel and vehicles are checked in accordance with enterprise operational procedures and statutory authority regulations
b. Receival and delivery of consignment is recorded in accordance with enterprise operational procedures to ensure identification of carrier, vehicle, consignment, receiver and documentation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
194
4. Coordinate responses on security incidents/ emergencies
a. Security incidents are dealt with in accordance with statutory authority regulations and workplace operational procedures
b. When reports of incidents are communicated, the intended message is transmitted in a concise style that conforms to enterprise policy
c. Potential security risks are observed and reported in accordance with operational procedures
5. Carry out
surveillance of work areas
a. Surveillance of work areas is in accordance with workplace operational procedures and regulatory requirements
b. Buildings and vehicles are appropriately secured c. Personnel and vehicles are authorised to be in a secured area in accordance
with workplace security procedures d. Checks are made to ensure that storage areas and consignments are secure e. Measures are taken to confirm that equipment is secure in accordance with
workplace procedures
6. Review and complete goods transfer operation
a. Activities completed are checked against operational plan b. Relevant documentation is completed c. Specialised equipment used for the process is maintained and stored d. Worksite is checked and returned to operational status
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
195
Range Of Variables PLAN AND MANAGE SECURITY PROCEDURES FOR TRANSFERRING AND TRANSPORTING DANGEROUS GOODS VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant Australian regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the warehousing,
storage, transport and distribution industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Indications of potential security risks may include: e.1. consignment is unsealed e.2. consignment in unusual position e.3. consignment displays evidence of having been tampered with e.4. loose goods in the consignment e.5. consignment presents a potential fire hazard e.6. signs of possible security breaches
f. Plans for dangerous goods transfer/loading operations may encompass consideration of: f.1. approved transfer site f.2. positioning of vehicle f.3. safe operating procedures f.4. specification of required personal protection and emergency equipment f.5. specification of required transfer equipment/assemblies f.6. permitted ullage and filling ratios and/or carrying capacities f.7. segregation and/or storage requirements f.8. emergency/incident procedures f.9. customer requirements
g. Planning processes may require application of problem solving and contingency management skills
h. Security arrangements may be routine or established for particular purposes i. Classes of dangerous goods are as defined in the respective Australian Codes j. Standard placarding, marking and signage for identified dangerous goods are
as required in the respective Australian Codes, including HAZCHEM codes
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
196
Range of Variables (continued) PLAN AND MANAGE SECURITY PROCEDURES FOR TRANSFERRING AND TRANSPORTING DANGEROUS GOODS VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
k. Hazards may include: k.1. hazardous or dangerous materials/goods k.2. contamination of, or from, materials being handled k.3. noise, light, energy sources k.4. stationary and moving machinery, parts or components k.5. service lines k.6. spill, leakages, ruptures k.7. dust/vapours k.8. ignition, fire and explosion
l. Hazard management is consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before safe working practices and personal protective equipment
m. Requirements for work may include: m.1. site restrictions and procedures m.2. use of safety and personal protection equipment m.3. communications equipment m.4. specialised lifting, transfer and/or handling equipment m.5. incident/accident/breakdown procedures m.6. additional gear and equipment m.7. authorities and permits m.8. noise restrictions m.9. hours of operation
n. Consultative processes may involve: n.1. employees, supervisors and managers n.2. suppliers, potential customers and existing clients n.3. equipment manufacturers and suppliers n.4. contractors n.5. regulatory authorities and internal and external emergency services n.6. dangerous goods and OHS specialists n.7. industrial relations specialists n.8. other professional or technical staff
o. Communications systems may involve: o.1. fixed and mobile telephone o.2. radio o.3. fax o.4. email o.5. electronic data transfer of information o.6. mail and internal memo
p. Personal protection equipment may include but is not limited to: p.1. gloves p.2. safety clothing p.3. safety headwear and footwear p.3. safety glasses p.4. two-way radios p.5. face mask and respirators p.6. high visibility clothing
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
197
Range of Variables (continued) PLAN AND MANAGE SECURITY PROCEDURES FOR TRANSFERRING AND TRANSPORTING DANGEROUS GOODS VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
q. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: q.1. company procedures q.2. enterprise procedures q.3. organisational procedures q.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including the ADG Code
a.2. goods identification numbers and codes, including ADG and IMDG markings and HAZCHEM signs
a.3. relevant codes of practice, including the Australian Dangerous Goods Code, the Australian Explosives Code, the Industry Safety Code, and National Standards for Manual Handling
a.4. manifests, bar codes, goods and container identification/serial number a.5. manufacturer’s specifications, instructions and labelling advice including
material safety data sheets a.6. workplace operating procedures, maintenance schedules and policies a.7. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.8. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of transport
options a.9. supplier and/or client instructions a.10. relevant Australian Standards, criteria and certification requirements a.11. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications a.12. quality assurance and customer service standards and procedures a.13. emergency procedures a.14. relevant competency standards and training materials a.15. QA plans, data and document control a.16. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice related to loading/unloading of goods
and manual handling including relevant road rules and mass and loading regulations
a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the handling and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including: a.2.1. Australian and International Dangerous Goods Codes a.2.2. Australian Marine Orders and the International Maritime
Dangerous Goods Code a.2.3. IATA's 'Dangerous Goods by Air' regulations a.2.4. Australian and International Explosives Codes
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
198
Range of Variables (continued) PLAN AND MANAGE SECURITY PROCEDURES FOR TRANSFERRING AND TRANSPORTING DANGEROUS GOODS VARIABLE SCOPE
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
(continued)
a.3. relevant Australian Standards such as: AS 1216, AS 1596, AS 1894, AS 1940, AS 2030.1-4, AS 2508.2.001-013, AS 2508.3.001-014
a.4. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.5. relevant State/Territory environmental protection legislation a.6. transport licence or permit requirements and associated mass and
loading regulations a.7. patent or copyright arrangements a.8. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.9. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.10. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
199
Evidence Guide PLAN AND MANAGE SECURITY PROCEDURES FOR TRANSFERRING AND TRANSPORTING DANGEROUS GOODS 1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. assess security risks arising from the nature of the load a.2. plan and implement procedures for the safe and efficient
loading/unloading and movement of dangerous goods a.3. select appropriate equipment and work systems to maintain the security
of loads within requirements for safe handling and protection of goods, transport, personnel and the public
a.4. identify job and site hazards and plan work to minimise risks a.5. determine (any) required permits and licensing requirements a.6. use appropriate communication strategies and equipment a.7. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.8. maintain enterprise records and documentation
2. Interdependent
assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant regulations and codes concerning the handling, transfer and transport of dangerous goods
b. Relevant aspects of ADG Code and relevant Australian Standards applicable to dangerous goods and hazardous substances
c. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations d. Workplace procedures for planning and managing security for transferring and
transporting dangerous goods and hazardous substances e. Security problems that may occur when transferring and transporting
dangerous goods and hazardous substances and action that can be taken to report or resolve the problems
f. Hazards that may exist when transferring and transporting dangerous goods and hazardous substances and ways of controlling the risks involved
g. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: g.1. focus of operation of work systems, resources, management and
workplace operating systems g.2. equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and
control g.3. regulatory, licence and permit requirements including the ADG Code g.4. quality and customer service standards, policies and procedures g.5. application of relevant Australian and international standards and
associated certification requirements g.6. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group g.7. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity g.8. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills g.9. relevant workplace documentation procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
200
Evidence Guide (continued) PLAN AND MANAGE SECURITY PROCEDURES FOR TRANSFERRING AND TRANSPORTING DANGEROUS GOODS 3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
h. Ability to: h.1. manage and prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to
workplace activities h.2. read and interpret operational and regulatory requirements, instructions
and manuals h.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during transfer and transport
of dangerous goods and hazardous substances h.4. identify the factors in work schedules, time and resource requirements
(including sourcing expertise external to the work team) when planning the transfer and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances
h.5. suggest improvements to housekeeping and workplace operations and negotiate changes
h.6. provide leadership to others h.7. provide customer/client service h.8. plan and organise systems and activities h.9. select and apply appropriate technology, information systems and
procedures h.10. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to plan and manage the transfer and transport of dangerous goods, and/or
a.2. plan and manage the transfer and transport of dangerous goods in an appropriate range of operational contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. assessing security risks arising from the nature of the load a.2. planning and managing procedures for the safe and efficient
transfer/transport of dangerous goods a.3. selecting appropriate equipment and work systems to maintain the
security of loads within requirements for safe handling and protection of goods, transport, personnel and the public
a.4. identifying job and site hazards and planning work to minimise risks a.5. determining (any) required permits and compliance with relevant
regulations/codes of practice b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including:
b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements including ADG Code and relevant regulations
b.2. OHS policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures) b.4. issue resolution procedures b.5. standards and guidelines relating to the safe use of vehicles, machinery
and equipment b.6. environmental protection procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
201
Evidence Guide (continued) PLAN AND MANAGE SECURITY PROCEDURES FOR TRANSFERRING AND TRANSPORTING DANGEROUS GOODS 5. Consistency in
performance (continued)
c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks, competency requirements, size of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified safety incidents, accidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. a. Assessment of competence must comply with the assessment requirements of the relevant State/Territory safeworking authority
b. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: b.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning b.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
b.2.1. at the Registered Training Organisation, and/or b.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 2 3 2
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
202
TDTP398B IMPLEMENT, MAINTAIN AND EVALUATE DANGEROUS GOODS TRANSPORT PROCEDURES WITHIN THE WORKPLACE
Field P Business Planning DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to implement, maintain and evaluate dangerous goods transport procedures within the workplace in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures. This includes implementing a policy framework for the transport and storage of dangerous goods; establishing and maintaining procedures for identifying hazards and risks; establishing and maintaining assessment procedures for monitoring conformance and controlling risks; implementing and monitoring procedures for maintaining dangerous goods records; and evaluating the implementation of dangerous goods transport policies, procedures and programs within the workplace. Persons achieving competence in this unit will need to fulfil all of the relevant State/Territory and Australian regulations and codes concerning the transport and storage of dangerous goods.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Implement a policy framework for the transport and storage of dangerous goods
a. Policies are developed to implement the ADG Code and dangerous goods transport and storage regulations consistent with overall workplace policies
b. Responsibilities and duties for the transport and storage of dangerous goods are clearly defined, allocated and included in job descriptions and duty statements for all relevant positions
c. Licensing requirements for employees (where relevant) are confirmed d. Consultative processes are developed and implemented e. Emergency incident/accident procedures are developed and implemented f. Information, instruction and training on dangerous goods transport and storage
procedures are provided to enable employees to effectively implement the required systems and processes
2. Establish and
maintain procedures for identifying hazards and risks
a. Hazards in the work area are identified and confirmed b. Procedures for ongoing identification of hazards and risks are developed and
integrated within work systems c. Hazards identification is addressed at the planning, design and evaluation
stages of any workplace change d. A maintenance and inspection program is instituted to confirm that vehicles,
equipment and storage areas comply with regulatory and enterprise requirements
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
203
3. Establish and maintain assessment procedures for monitoring conformance and controlling risks
a. Ongoing system for the control of risks, based on a hierarchy of control is developed and integrated within general work procedures
b. Measures to control assessed risks and monitor conformance are developed and implemented, in accordance with the ADG Code, relevant dangerous goods transport regulations, Code of Practice and priorities identified in the workplace
c. Non-conformance is investigated and procedures for rectification instituted d. Inadequacies in dangerous goods transport procedures are identified and
measures are implemented to improve workplace practice
4. Implement and monitor procedures for maintaining dangerous goods records
a. A dangerous goods records system is established in accordance with relevant legislative framework
b. Accurate and legible records for operation within the workplace are completed in accordance with the ADG Code, dangerous goods transport enterprise policies and legislative requirements
5. Evaluate the
implementation of dangerous goods transport policies, procedures and programs within the workplace
a. The effectiveness of the dangerous goods transport policies, procedures and programs is assessed
b. Improvements to dangerous goods transport procedures are identified and implemented
c. Compliance with the ADG Code, Dangerous Goods Transport Regulations and Codes of Practice is assessed to ensure legal requirements are maintained as a minimum and exceeded where possible
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
204
Range Of Variables IMPLEMENT, MAINTAIN AND EVALUATE DANGEROUS GOODS TRANSPORT PROCEDURES WITHIN THE WORKPLACE VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant Australian regulations, standards and codes of practice, including the ADG Code
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and who provide leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the warehousing,
storage, transport and distribution industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night in all weather conditions d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Plans for dangerous goods transport procedures may encompass consideration of: e.1. approved transfer site e.2. positioning of vehicle when loading/unloading e.3. safe operating and driving procedures e.4. specification of required personal protection and emergency equipment e.5. specification of required transfer equipment/assemblies e.6. permitted ullage and filling ratios and or carrying capacities e.7. segregation and/or storage requirements e.8. emergency/incident/breakdown procedures e.9. customer requirements
f. Classes of dangerous goods are as defined in the respective Australian Codes g. Policies and procedures for the transportation of dangerous goods must
conform to relevant legislative framework and guidance material h. Hazards may include:
h.1. hazardous or dangerous materials h.2. contamination of, or from, materials being handled h.3. noise, light, energy sources h.4. stationary and moving machinery, parts or components h.5. service lines h.6. spill, leakages, ruptures h.7. dust/vapours
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
205
Range of Variables (continued) IMPLEMENT, MAINTAIN AND EVALUATE DANGEROUS GOODS TRANSPORT PROCEDURES WITHIN THE WORKPLACE VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Hazard management is consistent with the principle of hierarchy of control with elimination, substitution, isolation and engineering control measures being selected before safe working practices and personal protective equipment
j. Requirements for work may include: j.1. site restrictions and procedures j.2. use of safety and personal protection equipment j.3. communications equipment j.4. specialised transfer/transport equipment j.5. incident/accident/breakdown procedures j.6. additional gear and equipment j.7. noise restrictions j.8. hours of operation j.9. authorities and permits
k. Consultative processes may involve: k.1. employees, supervisors and managers k.2. supplier instructions k.3. equipment manufacturers and suppliers k.4. contractors k.5. industrial relations and OHS specialists k.6. other professional or technical staff
l. Communications systems may involve: l.1. fixed and mobile telephone l.2. radio l.3. fax l.4. email l.5. electronic data transfer of information l.6. mail and internal memo
m. Personal protection equipment may include but is not limited to: m.1. gloves m.2. safety clothing m.3. safety headwear and footwear m.4. safety glasses m.5. two-way radios m.6. face mask and respirators m.7. high visibility clothing
n. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: n.1. company procedures n.2. enterprise procedures n.3. organisational procedures n.4. established procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
206
Range of Variables (continued) IMPLEMENT, MAINTAIN AND EVALUATE DANGEROUS GOODS TRANSPORT PROCEDURES WITHIN THE WORKPLACE VARIABLE SCOPE
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including the ADG Code
a.2. goods identification numbers and codes, including ADG and IMDG markings and HAZCHEM signs
a.3. relevant codes of practice, including the Australian Dangerous Goods Code, the Australian Explosives Code, the Industry Safety Code, and National Standards for Manual Handling
a.4. manifests, bar codes, goods and container identification/serial number a.5. manufacturer’s specifications, instructions and labelling advice including
material safety data sheets a.6. workplace operating procedures, maintenance schedules and policies a.7. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.8. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of transport
options a.9. supplier and/or client instructions a.10. relevant Australian Standards, criteria and certification requirements a.11. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications a.12. quality assurance and customer service standards and procedures a.13. emergency procedures a.14. relevant competency standards and training materials a.15. QA plans, data and document control a.16. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice related to transport of goods and
manual handling including relevant road rules and mass and loading regulations
a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the handling, transfer and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including: a.2.1. Australian and International Dangerous Goods Codes a.2.2. Australian Marine Orders and the International Maritime
Dangerous Goods Code a.2.3. IATA's 'Dangerous Goods by Air' regulations a.2.4. Australian and International Explosives Codes
a.3. relevant Australian Standards such as: AS 1216, AS 1596, AS 1894, AS 1940, AS 2030.1-4, AS 2508.2.001-013, AS 2508.3.001-014
a.4. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.5. relevant State/Territory environmental protection legislation a.6. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.7. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.8. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.9. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
207
Evidence Guide IMPLEMENT, MAINTAIN AND EVALUATE DANGEROUS GOODS TRANSPORT PROCEDURES WITHIN THE WORKPLACE 1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. implement and monitor policies and processes for the transport of
dangerous goods a.2. suggest improvements to dangerous goods transport procedures and
negotiate changes where required a.3. mediate and resolve issues surrounding the transport of dangerous
goods, maximising positive outcomes for the workplace and the individuals within it
a.4. identify requirements of tasks and organise planning, job completion and evaluation stages
a.5. liaise with authorities, drivers, line managers and customers to ensure that policies and procedures are meeting required needs
a.6. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.7. provide customer/client service and work effectively with others
2. Interdependent
assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Regulations and codes concerning the transport of goods and freight b. ADG Code and relevant Australian Standards applicable to dangerous goods
and hazardous substances c. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations d. Workplace processes for implementing, maintaining and evaluating dangerous
goods transport procedures e. Problems that may occur during the transport of dangerous goods and
hazardous substances and action that can be taken to report or resolve the problems
f. Hazards that may exist during the transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances and ways of controlling the risks involved
g. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: g.1. focus of operation of dangerous goods transport systems, resources,
management and workplace operating systems g.2. equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and
control g.3. regulatory, licence and permit requirements for dangerous goods
transport g.4. quality and customer service standards, policies and procedures g.5. application of relevant Australian and international standards and
associated certification requirements g.6. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group g.7. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity g.8. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills g.9. relevant workplace documentation procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
208
Evidence Guide (continued) IMPLEMENT, MAINTAIN AND EVALUATE DANGEROUS GOODS TRANSPORT PROCEDURES WITHIN THE WORKPLACE 3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
h. Ability to: h.1. manage and prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to
workplace activities h.2. read and interpret operational and regulatory requirements, instructions
and manuals h.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the implementation,
maintenance and evaluation of dangerous goods transport procedures h.4. identify the factors in work schedules, time and resource requirements
(including sourcing expertise external to the work team) when implementing, maintaining and evaluating dangerous goods transport procedures
h.5. suggest improvements to housekeeping and workplace operations and negotiate changes
h.6. provide leadership to others h.7. provide customer/client service h.8. plan and organise systems and activities h.9. select and apply appropriate technology, information systems and
procedures h.10. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to implement, maintain and evaluate dangerous goods transport procedures in a workplace, and/or
a.2. implement, maintain and evaluate dangerous goods transport procedures in an appropriate range of workplace operational contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. implementing and monitoring policies and processes for the transport of dangerous goods
a.2. suggesting improvements to dangerous goods transport procedures and negotiating changes where required
a.3. mediating and resolving issues surrounding the transport of dangerous goods, maximising positive outcomes for the workplace and the individuals within it
a.4. identifying requirements of tasks and organising planning, job completion and evaluation stages
a.5. liaising with authorities, drivers, line managers and customers to ensure that policies and procedures are meeting required needs
a.6. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information a.7. providing customer/client service and working effectively with others
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
209
Evidence Guide (continued) IMPLEMENT, MAINTAIN AND EVALUATE DANGEROUS GOODS TRANSPORT PROCEDURES WITHIN THE WORKPLACE 5. Consistency in
performance (continued)
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements including ADG
Code and related regulations b.2. OHS policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures) b.4. issue resolution procedures b.5. standards and guidelines relating to the safe use of vehicles, machinery
and equipment b.6. environmental protection procedures
c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks, competency requirements, size of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified safety incidents, accidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of competence must comply with the assessment requirements of the relevant State/Territory safeworking authority
b. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by A Registered Training Organisation: b.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning b.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
b.2.1. at the Registered Training Organisation, and/or b.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 2 3 2
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
210
TDTP498B DEVELOP A TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION BUSINESS PLAN Field P Business Planning DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to develop a business plan for an organisation or a discrete business unit in the transport, storage and distribution industries in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures. This includes conducting a situational and market analysis, analysing the organisational environment, developing appropriate strategies, and implementing and evaluating the resulting business plan.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Situational and Market analysis
a. The transport and distribution business’s principal services, markets, products and the factors that distinguish the business and contribute to its success are identified
b. The transport and distribution business/operating environment is defined and reviewed using information from staff members, customer feedback and external sources
c. Qualitative and quantitative market analysis data is documented d. Target markets and relevant regulatory requirements are identified e. Impact of transport and distribution business on market is recorded and
projected change in market and/or services during the life of the plan is projected
f. Competitors, customer perceptions and market share of existing competitors operating in the transport and distribution industry are identified
g. Proposed business focus on specific target markets, pricing, sales and appeals are defined
h. Potential profitable opportunities are identified and documented
2. Analyse organisational environment
a. Current transport and distribution business operations, practices, work flow, equipment and facilities are analysed
b. Capability of the organisation in terms of technology, research, development and tools is outlined
c. Current resources and any resources that may be accessed to meet identified opportunities for business operations are evaluated
d. Developments in technologies predicted within the lifetime of the business plan are evaluated and analysed
e. Capability of the organisation in terms of staff, equipment, facilities, operational systems and financial status are assessed for strengths and weaknesses
f. Costs of making operational adjustments in relation to existing and new business to influence improved profitability and positioning are reviewed
g. Premises for decisions are documented, potential circumstances which may alter the environment are identified and contingency provisions are made
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
211
3. Develop strategies
a. Benchmark goals are documented and checked for realism in terms of internal and external environmental factors
b. Decisions and adjustments regarding resource allocation to various products and services are made, based on external and internal analyses
c. Organisational adjustments are documented and implementation strategies established
d. Projections of profit and loss or income statements per quarter until break-even point are constructed for the whole organisation and each cost centre
e. A finalised business plan including performance indicators is prepared in accordance with enterprise requirements and circulated to stakeholders
f. Questions and feedback from stakeholders are responded to promptly and, where appropriate, incorporated into the plan
4. Implement and
evaluate business plan
a. Implementation plans for the management of workplaces, staff, business operation and operational systems are monitored and, where required, adjustments to the plans are made
b. Current and future marketing strategies and any areas of specialisation are detailed and implemented
c. Performance of the organisation in relation to the identified performance indicators are regularly monitored and reviewed
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
212
Range Of Variables
DEVELOP A TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION BUSINESS PLAN
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Business activities must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant Australian and international regulations, standards and codes of practice
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and who provide leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the warehousing,
storage, transport and distribution industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Transport and distribution operations may be conducted by day or night in all
weather conditions d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site locations d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Business systems may include: e.1. transport and distribution policies, protocols and procedures e.2. communications systems e.3. scope of workplace operations e.4. authorities and permits e.5. hours of operation e.6. relevant regulations
f. The transport and distribution business plan may be developed for a whole organisation or a business unit within an organisation
g. Products may be goods and/or services h. Consultative processes may involve:
h.1. employees, supervisors and managers h.2. suppliers and current or potential clients h.3. relevant authorities, government departments and institutions h.4. representatives of other enterprises and organisations t h.5. industrial relations and OHS specialists h.6. other professional or technical staff
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
213
Range of Variables (continued)
DEVELOP A TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION BUSINESS PLAN
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Communications systems may involve: i.1. fixed and mobile telephone i.2. radio i.3. fax i.4. email i.5. electronic data transfer of information i.6. mail and internal memo i.7. RF systems
j. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: j.1. company procedures j.2. enterprise procedures j.3. organisational procedures j.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
business operations a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage, transfer and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including the ADG and IDG Code
a.3. workplace operating procedures and policies a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of transport
options a.6. supplier and/or client instructions a.7. Australian and international standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.8. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications a.9. quality assurance standards and procedures a.10. emergency procedures a.11. relevant competency standards and training materials a.12. QA plans, data and document control a.13. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
214
Range of Variables (continued)
DEVELOP A TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION BUSINESS PLAN
VARIABLE SCOPE
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice relevant to business operations a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage, transport and transfer of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including: a.2.1. Australian and International Dangerous Goods Codes a.2.2. Australian Marine Orders and the International Maritime
Dangerous Goods Code a.2.3. IATA's 'Dangerous Goods by Air' regulations a.2.4. Australian and International Explosives Codes
a.3. relevant Australian and international standards and certification requirements
a.4. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.5. relevant State/Territory environmental protection legislation a.6. relevant licence or permit requirements and associated regulations a.7. patent or copyright arrangements a.8. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.9. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.10. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
215
Evidence Guide
DEVELOP A TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION BUSINESS PLAN
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. select appropriate strategies to develop, implement and evaluate the
transport and distribution business plan including identification of circumstances where external expertise is required
a.2. develop transport and distribution business plans directed to achieve workplace goals and required results
a.3. suggest improvements to business operations and negotiate to implement the transport and distribution business plan
a.4. apply techniques to encourage appropriate participation of team/group members and relevant external expertise in the development of the transport and distribution business plan
a.5. locate, interpret and apply relevant information to inform transport and distribution business plan formulation and evaluation
a.6. improve customer/client service and work effectively with others to develop and implement the transport and distribution business plan
a.7. maintain workplace records and documentation
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Australian and international regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements relevant to business operations
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace processes for the development of a transport and distribution
business plan d. Problems that may occur during the development of a transport and
distribution business plan and action that can be taken to report or resolve the problems
e. Hazards that may exist in the operation of a transport and distribution business and ways of controlling the risks involved
f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: f.1. focus of operation of competitor and internal business systems,
resources, management and workplace operating systems f.2. equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and
control f.3. market and other external environmental factors including the regulatory
environment f.4. organisational strengths and weaknesses including the competencies of
individuals in the team/group f.5. application of relevant Australian and international standards and
associated certification requirements f.6. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.7. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.8. relevant workplace documentation procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
216
Evidence Guide (continued)
DEVELOP A TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION BUSINESS PLAN
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g. Ability to: g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to workplace
activities g.2. access, read and interpret business and market data, regulatory
requirements and other planning information g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the development of a
transport and distribution business plan g.4. provide leadership to others g.5. plan and organise business systems and activities g.6. select and apply appropriate technology, information systems and
procedures a.7. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to develop a transport and distribution business plan, and/or
a.2. develop a transport and distribution business plan in an appropriate range of transport, warehousing, storage and distribution business contexts involving relevant market intelligence, systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. selecting appropriate strategies to develop, implement and evaluate the transport and distribution business plan
a.2. developing transport and distribution business plans a.3. suggesting improvements to business operations and negotiating to
implement the transport and distribution business plan a.4. applying techniques to encourage appropriate participation of
team/group members and relevant external expertise in the development of the transport and distribution business plan
a.5. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information to inform transport and distribution business plan formulation and evaluation
a.6. improving customer/client service and working effectively with others to develop and implement the transport and distribution business plan
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality assurance,
customer service, security and housekeeping procedures) b.4. issue resolution procedures b.5. standards and guidelines relating to the safe use of vehicles, machinery
and equipment c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified incidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
217
Evidence Guide (continued)
DEVELOP A TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION BUSINESS PLAN
5. Consistency in
performance (continued)
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
218
TDTP698B ESTABLISH INTERNATIONAL DISTRIBUTION NETWORKS Field P Business Planning DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to establish international distribution networks in accordance with workplace procedures. This includes sourcing potential networks, establishing potential service providers’ profiles, and contracting suitable service providers.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Source potential networks
a. Current and required future enterprise distribution networks are identified b. Potential agents, capable of servicing current or potential operations, are
identified c. Initial contact is undertaken with potential service providers d. Information is sourced from potential service agents regarding their capacity,
capability and viability to meet identified operations
2. Establish potential service provider’s profile
a. Distributor’s contact details, scope of operation(s) and cost and service standards are evaluated and documented
b. An assessment of the service provider’s technostructures and infrastructures is undertaken, including the compatibility of the system(s) to own operations
c. Service provider’s current credit ratings are established in accordance with enterprise procedures
d. Security procedures for potential service providers are established in accordance with workplace requirements
3. Contract service
providers a. Terms of operation and performance standards are negotiated with selected
service providers b. Contracts are completed with selected service provider(s) within scope of
authority c. The performance of service providers is monitored against identified targets
within the contract d. Variances to contracts are renegotiated in accordance with statutory
requirements and changes within the international and local trading environments
e. Contracts and ancillary documentation is stored in accordance with enterprise and regulatory requirements
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
219
Range Of Variables
ESTABLISH INTERNATIONAL DISTRIBUTION NETWORKS
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant Australian and international regulations, standards and codes of practice
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and who provide leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the warehousing,
storage, transport and distribution industries involved in the international distribution of freight and goods
b. Customers may be internal or external, domestic and international c. Operations may be conducted by day or night in all weather conditions d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site locations d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Requirements for work may include: e.1. limits of authority in relation to determination of contracts e.2. international codes of practice e.3. communications equipment e.4. international financial control and exchange regulations e.5. international markets e.6. authorities and permits
f. Consultative processes may involve: f.1. service providers f.2. other employees and supervisors f.3. financial and government institutions f.4. suppliers, potential customers and existing clients f.5. management and union representatives f.6. freight forwarding agencies and specialists f.7. custom brokers f.8. other professional or technical staff
g. Service providers will be from a range of organisations, countries and differ significantly in their capability and capacity to undertake freight forwarding operations. Assessment should confirm the applicability of new providers to provide a quality, cost competitive service within agreed service parameters.
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
220
Range of Variables (continued)
ESTABLISH INTERNATIONAL DISTRIBUTION NETWORKS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
h. Communications systems may involve: h.1. fixed or mobile telephone h.2. radio h.3. fax h.4. email h.5. electronic data transfer of information h.6. mail and internal memos h.7. RF systems
i. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: i.1. company procedures i.2. enterprise procedures i.3. organisational procedures i.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
the international distribution of goods and freight a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including the ADG and IDG Code
a.3. workplace operating procedures and policies a.4. contract documents a.5. insurance documentation a.6. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.7. manufacturer's/supplier's specifications, instructions and labelling advice,
including material safety data sheets a.8. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of transport
and distribution options a.9. client instructions a.10. relevant Australian and international standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.11. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications a.12. customer service and quality assurance standards and procedures a.13. emergency procedures a.14. relevant competency standards and training materials a.15. QA plans, data and document control a.16. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
221
Range of Variables (continued)
ESTABLISH INTERNATIONAL DISTRIBUTION NETWORKS
VARIABLE SCOPE
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice for the international transfer of freight a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling and transfer of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including: a.2.1. Australian and International Dangerous Goods Codes a.2.2. Australian Marine Orders and the International Maritime
Dangerous Goods Code a.2.3. IATA's 'Dangerous Goods by Air' regulations a.2.4. Australian and International Explosives Codes
a.3. Australian and international insurance regulations and legislation a.4. Australian and international standards and certification requirements a.5. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.6. relevant State/Territory environmental protection legislation a.7. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.8. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.9. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.10. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
222
Evidence Guide
ESTABLISH INTERNATIONAL DISTRIBUTION NETWORKS
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. evaluate current and potential service provider performance a.2. identify potential new service providers a.3. negotiate, confirm and monitor contractual arrangements a.4. handle international trading accounts a.5. communicate effectively with international and domestic banks,
governments, clients, suppliers and service providers a.6. effectively adjust to changing circumstances within the international and
local trading environment a.7. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.8. maintain workplace records and documentation
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Australian and international regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements relevant to the establishment and maintenance of international distribution networks
b. ADG and IDG Codes and relevant Australian and international regulations and standards applicable to transport and distribution of dangerous goods and hazardous substances
c. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations d. Workplace policies and processes for the establishment of an international
distribution network e. Problems that may occur during the establishment of an international
distribution network and action that can be taken to report or resolve the problems
f. Hazards and risks that may arise during the establishment of an international distribution network and ways of controlling the risks involved
g. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: g.1. focus of operation of distribution systems, resources, management and
workplace operating systems g.2. contract law a.3. international and domestic trade operations a.4. operational procedures for document control a.5. international legislation regarding carriage of goods a.6. banking procedures and exchange rates g.7. quality and customer service standards, policies and procedures g.8. application of relevant Australian and international standards and
associated certification requirements g.9. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group g.10. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity g.11. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
223
Evidence Guide (continued)
ESTABLISH INTERNATIONAL DISTRIBUTION NETWORKS
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
h. Ability to: h.1. assess logistics functions h.2. negotiate and monitor contracts h.3. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to workplace
activities h.4. access, read and interpret contracts, distribution specifications,
regulatory requirements and customer instructions h.5. identify and solve problems that may arise during the establishment of
an international distribution network h.6. provide leadership to others h.7. plan and organise international distribution systems and projects h.8. select and apply appropriate computing and communications
technology, information systems and procedures h.9. maintain workplace records and documentation systems h.10. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment h.11. resolve issues and conflicts
4. Resource
implications a. Access is required to opportunities to:
a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to establish an international distribution network, and/or
a.2. establish an international distribution network in an appropriate operational transport and distribution context involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. evaluating current and potential service provider performance a.2. identifying potential new service providers a.3. negotiating, confirming and monitoring contractual arrangements a.4. handling international trading accounts a.5. communicating effectively with international and domestic banks,
governments, clients, suppliers and service providers a.6. adjusting to changing circumstances within the international and local
trading environment b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including:
b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international transport and distribution regulations
b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality, customer
service, security and housekeeping procedures) b.4. issue resolution procedures b.5. standards and guidelines relating to the effective and efficient use of
transport and distribution systems c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified incidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
224
Evidence Guide (continued)
ESTABLISH INTERNATIONAL DISTRIBUTION NETWORKS
5. Consistency in
performance (continued)
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
225
TDTP798B CONTRIBUTE TO THE DEVELOPMENT OF A WORKPLACE LEARNING ENVIRONMENT
Field P Business Planning DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to contribute to the development of a workplace learning environment in accordance with workplace procedures. This includes creating learning opportunities, facilitating and promoting learning, and monitoring and improving learning effectiveness. This unit is equivalent to Frontline Management Unit BSXFMI511A 'Contribute to the development of a workplace learning environment'. It has been suitably contextualised to meet the requirements of the transport,, distribution, storage and warehousing industries.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Create learning opportunities
a. Workplace environments which facilitate learning are developed and supported b. Learning plans are developed as an integral part of individual/team
performance plans c. Learning plans reflect the diversity of needs and learning opportunities of
individual employees and the enterprise d. Individual/team access to, and participation in, learning opportunities is
facilitated including both formal and informal learning opportunities e. Negotiation with training and development specialists results in the planning
and provision of learning which enhances the operation of the workplace
2. Facilitate and promote learning
a. Workplace activities are used as opportunities for learning b. Coaching and mentoring contributes effectively to development of workplace
knowledge, skills and attitudes c. The benefits of learning are shared with others in the team/workplace d. Workplace achievement is recognised by timely and appropriate recognition,
feedback and rewards
3. Monitor and improve learning effectiveness
a. Feedback from individuals/teams is used to identify and introduce improvements in future learning arrangements
b. Adjustments negotiated with training and development specialists result in improvements to the efficiency and effectiveness of learning
c. Records and reports of competency are documented and maintained within the workplace systems and procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
226
Range Of Variables
CONTRIBUTE TO THE DEVELOPMENT OF A WORKPLACE LEARNING ENVIRONMENT
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant Australian regulations, standards and codes of practice
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and who provide leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Learning activities may be provided in various work environments in the
warehousing, storage, transport and distribution industries b. This unit operates in an environment where workplace structures support
workplace learning c. Customers may be internal or external d. Operations may be conducted by day or night e. The workplace environment may involve:
e.1. twenty-four hour operation e.2. single and multi-site locations e.3. large, medium and small workplaces
f. Workplace learning environment may involve: f.1. both internal and external competency-based learning opportunities f.2. structured and non-structured learning opportunities f.3. workplace on-the-job coaching and mentoring f.4. opportunities for the recognition of skills and knowledge gained through
previous learning and experience g. Consultative and learning processes may involve:
g.1. employees, supervisors and managers g.2. training providers and assessors g.3. relevant authorities, government departments and institutions g.4. industrial relations and OHS specialists g.5. other professional or technical staff
h. Communications systems may involve: h.1. fixed and mobile telephone h.2. radio h.3. fax h.4. email h.5. electronic data transfer of information h.6. mail and internal memo
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
227
Range of Variables (continued)
CONTRIBUTE TO THE DEVELOPMENT OF A WORKPLACE LEARNING ENVIRONMENT
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: i.1. company procedures i.2. enterprise procedures i.3. organisational procedures i.4. established procedures
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. codes of practice and regulations relevant to workplace operations a.2. workplace procedures and policies for creation of a workplace learning
environment a.3. training manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.4. relevant competency standards and assessment materials a.5. training materials and learning resources a.6. Australian and international standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.7. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications a.8. quality assurance standards and procedures a.9. emergency procedures a.10. QA plans, data and document control a.11. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable regulations and legislation may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice relevant to workplace operations a.2. Australian and international standards and certification requirements a.3. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.4. relevant State/Territory environmental protection legislation a.5. regulations applicable to competency based training and assessment
carried out within the Australian Recognition Framework a.6. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.7. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.8. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
228
Evidence Guide
CONTRIBUTE TO THE DEVELOPMENT OF A WORKPLACE LEARNING ENVIRONMENT
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. create an environment which enables opportunities for individuals/teams
to learn from workplace performance a.2. promote a learning culture in a diverse and complex workplace a.3. explain adult learning principles and link learning to work a.4. facilitate and promote opportunities for both formal and informal learning a.5. manage own work to achieve workplace goals and required results a.6. suggest improvements to training and development operations and
negotiate changes a.7. mediate and resolve issues concerning training and assessment,
maximising positive outcomes for the workplace and the individuals within it
a.8. apply techniques to encourage cross-learning of team/group members and external organisations or individuals with relevant expertise
a.9. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.10. provide customer/client service and work effectively with others
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace policies and processes for the development of a workplace learning
environment d. Problems that may occur during the development of a workplace learning
environment and action that can be taken to report or resolve the problems e. Operational knowledge and understanding may include:
e.1. business policies and plans including training and assessment e.2. focus of operation of work systems, resources, management and
workplace operating systems e.3. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity e.4. application of relevant assessment guidelines and endorsed competency
standards appropriate for the workplace e.5. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group e.6. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills e.7. quality and customer service standards, policies and procedures e.8. relevant workplace documentation procedures
f. Ability to: f.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to workplace
learning opportunities and activities f.2. read and interpret competency standards, job specifications, training and
assessment instructions and materials f.3. apply relevant assessment guidelines and endorsed competency
standards appropriate for the workplace f.4. identify and solve problems that may arise in the development of a
workplace learning environment
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
229
Evidence Guide (continued)
CONTRIBUTE TO THE DEVELOPMENT OF A WORKPLACE LEARNING ENVIRONMENT
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
f.5. provide leadership and assistance to others f.6. plan and organise learning opportunities f.7. select and apply appropriate technology, learning and assessment
resources, information systems and procedures f.8. maintain relevant workplace records and documentation f.9. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to contribute to the development of a workplace learning environment, and/or
a.2. contribute to the development of workplace learning environments in an appropriate range of transport, warehousing, storage and/or distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. creating a learning environment a.2. promoting a learning culture in the workplace a.3. explaining adult learning principles and linking learning to work a.4. facilitating and promoting opportunities for both formal and informal
learning a.5. suggesting improvements to training and development operations and
negotiating changes a.7. mediating and resolving issues surrounding training and assessment a.8. encouraging cross-learning of team/group members and external
organisations or individuals with relevant expertise b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including:
b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements b.2. relevant OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions concerning the creation of a
workplace learning environment b.4. issue resolution procedures b.5. procedures for establishing effective working relationships with
colleagues c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified learning difficulties in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
230
Evidence Guide (continued)
CONTRIBUTE TO THE DEVELOPMENT OF A WORKPLACE LEARNING ENVIRONMENT
6. Context for
assessment a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training
Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 2 3 2
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
231
TDTP898B MANAGE A TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION BUSINESS UNIT Field P Business Planning DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to manage a transport and distribution business unit in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures. This includes identifying the market for the business unit, setting transport and distribution business unit objectives, collecting information for business planning operations, establishing the resources required to achieve objectives, and managing business unit performance to achieve the required outcomes.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Identify market
a. Existing customers are identified and feedback gained regarding performance b. Improvements are planned to increase service provision c. Potential customers are identified and arrangements made to target potential
customers
2. Set transport and distribution business unit objectives
a. Goals for the transport and distribution business are identified in accordance with enterprise business plan
b. Key performance indicators are defined and documented c. A strategy to achieve transport and distribution business unit objectives in the
short, medium and long term is prepared d. Contingency plans are developed in the event that objectives need to be varied
3. Collect information for business planning operations
a. Information on market competitors, potential opportunities and weaknesses of the business is collected, analysed and organised
b. Available resources are identified taking into account customer needs and the business objectives
4. Establish
resources to achieve objectives
a. Financial flows are planned and scheduled b. Information on-costs and resource utilisation is interpreted and budget
requirements are identified c. Staff and physical resource requirements are identified and costed to meet the
business requirements d. Job profiles are determined and resources are made available for training to
meet business objectives e. Transport and distribution business unit objectives and related policies and
practices are explained to employees f. Resource acquisition is managed to ensure business objectives are achieved
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
232
5. Manage business unit performance
a. Systems and processes are established to assess progress in achieving profit/productivity plans and targets
b. Systems for resource acquisition and usage are established c. Financial information is analysed and interpreted to monitor profit/productivity
performance d. Systems and processes are monitored to establish whether resources are
being used as planned e. Problems with resource usage are investigated and rectified f. Effective action is taken to reduce costs and enhance value to customers
and/or enterprise g. Recommendations for variations to operational plans are negotiated and
approved by any relevant parties h. Performance reports are generated in accordance with enterprise procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
233
Range Of Variables
MANAGE A TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION BUSINESS UNIT
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant Australian and international regulations, standards and codes of practice
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and who provide leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. The business unit may be a complete small business enterprise, or a unit within
a larger organisation, within the warehousing, storage, transport and distribution industries
b. This unit requires the application of system management processes to ensure business objectives are achieved
c. Customers may be internal or external d. Operations may be conducted by day or night an any weather conditions e. The workplace environment may involve:
e.1. twenty-four hour operation e.2. single and multi-site locations e.3. large, medium and small workplaces
f. Services, products, risks, work systems and requirements potentially vary in different sections of the workplace
g. Consultative processes may involve: g.1. employees, supervisors and managers g.2. customers and suppliers g.3. relevant authorities, government departments and institutions g.4. representatives of other enterprises and organisations with an interest in
the business activities of the unit/organisation g.5. industrial relations and OHS specialists g.6. other professional or technical staff
h. Communications systems may involve: h.1. fixed and mobile telephone h.2. radio h.3. fax h.4. email h.5. electronic data transfer of information h.6. mail and internal memo
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
234
Range of Variables (continued)
MANAGE A TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION BUSINESS UNIT
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: i.1. company procedures i.2. enterprise procedures i.3. organisational procedures i.4. established procedures
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. Australian codes of practice and regulations relevant to business unit
operations a.2. business policies and operating procedures a.3. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.4. supplier and/or client instructions a.5. relevant Australian Standards, criteria and certification requirements a.6. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications a.7. quality assurance standards and procedures a.8. emergency procedures a.9. relevant competency standards and training materials a.10. QA plans, data and document control a.11. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable regulations and legislation may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice relevant to business unit operations a.2. relevant codes and regulations for the carriage and storage of hazardous
substances and dangerous goods, where applicable a.3. relevant Australian Standards and certification requirements a.4. relevant trade practices legislation a.5. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.6. relevant State/Territory environmental protection legislation a.7. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.8. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.9. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
235
Evidence Guide
MANAGE A TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION BUSINESS UNIT
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. manage operations to achieve business goals and key performance
indicators a.2. use market knowledge to improve services and work processes a.3. maintain workplace records and appropriate statistical data a.4. develop relationships with external personnel to assist in achieving
goals/results a.5. locate, interpret and apply relevant information to prepare financial and
business documentation a.6. communicate effectively in writing and orally to explain business
objectives and financial concepts a.7. prepare resource proposals within budget
2. Interdependent
assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Australian and international regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements relevant to business unit activities
b. Relevant OHS and environmental procedures and regulations c. Workplace policies and processes for the management of a transport and
distribution business unit d. Problems that may occur when managing a transport and distribution
business unit and action that can be taken to report or resolve the problems e. Hazards and risks that may arise during the management of a transport and
distribution business unit and ways of controlling the risks involved f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include:
f.1. business policies and priorities f.2. market intelligence relevant to business operations f.3. information on key competitors' operations, strengths and weaknesses f.4. focus of operation of work systems, resources, management and
workplace operating systems f.5. quality and customer service standards, policies and procedures f.6. application of relevant Australian and international standards and
associated certification requirements f.7. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.8. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.9. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills g. Ability to:
g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to business activities
g.2. access, read and interpret operational data, regulatory requirements, market intelligence, finance/budgetary information and business policies
g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the management of a transport and distribution business unit
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
236
Evidence Guide (continued)
MANAGE A TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION BUSINESS UNIT
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g.4. identify opportunities for improvements to services, resource allocation and use
g.5. apply strategies to implement continuous improvement processes g.6. provide leadership to others g.7. plan and organise business systems and activities, including predicting
consequences and identifying improvements g.8. select and apply appropriate workplace technology, information systems
and procedures a.9. maintain business records and documentation g.10. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to manage a transport and distribution business unit, and/or
a.2. manage a transport and distribution business unit in an appropriate operational transport, warehousing, storage and distribution context involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. managing operations to achieve business goals and key performance indicators
a.2. using market knowledge to improve services and work processes a.3. maintaining workplace records and appropriate statistical data a.4. developing relationships with external personnel to assist in achieving
goals/results a.5. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information to prepare
financial and business documentation a.6. communicating effectively in writing and orally to explain business
objectives and financial concepts a.7. preparing resource proposals within budget
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements including local
and international freight regulations b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including customer service,
quality assurance, security and housekeeping procedures) b.4. issue resolution procedures b.5. standards and guidelines relating to the safe use of vehicles, machinery
and equipment c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified incidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
237
Evidence Guide (continued)
MANAGE A TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION BUSINESS UNIT
5. Consistency in
performance (continued)
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 2 3 3 2
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
238
TDTP998B PLAN AND MAINTAIN WAREHOUSE LAYOUTS AND INVENTORY LOCATIONS
Field P Business Planning DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to plan and maintain warehouse layouts and inventory locations in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures. This includes identifying space requirements, identifying safety and security needs, developing the required documentation system, designing storage zones, and evaluating warehouse utilisation.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Identify space requirements
a. The medium and long-term needs of the organisation are assessed to facilitate planning in accordance with the business plan of the workplace and regulatory requirements
b. Product type, picking frequencies, value, fragility, weight, handling characteristics, quantity and holding periods are assessed to consider type and amount of storage
c. Warehouse throughput is assessed to determine the stock holding and handling requirements for each inventory item
d. Volume requirements are calculated to ensure the ongoing stock holding needs are met
e. The total space requirement is calculated and used to formulate plan for space utilisation
2. Identify safety and
security requirements
a. An assessment is made of risks to ensure maximum safety and security for personnel, stock and facilities
b. Storage handling security and incident/emergency procedures for each class or type of product are identified and documented
c. Procedures to safely use equipment and substances in the workplace are identified and documented
d. Fire prevention and fire fighting systems are identified in accordance with building code regulations and storage material requirements
e. An evacuation plan is developed in accordance with the safety program of the workplace
3. Develop
documentation system
a. A system for recording and tracing stock location, receival, throughput and despatch is developed and implemented to enable reporting, quality assurance and financial requirements to be met
b. A system for recording communication with carriers, customers and employees is developed and implemented to assess operational effectiveness and to provide data for system improvement
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
239
4. Design storage zones
a. Space requirements and equipment operation are accurately assessed to facilitate the planning of warehouse zones
b. An assessment is made of the warehouse environment to enable the most effective use of available space
c. Positioning of storage areas, bays, work stations and the like is undertaken in accordance with data obtained from the planning process
5. Evaluate
warehouse utilisation
a. A continual system of review is used involving regular checks to ensure storage areas and systems are functioning at optimum levels
b. Receival and despatch systems are appropriately assessed to ensure that they provide adequately for efficient operations
c. Storage and handling systems are inspected to confirm that they provide ease of access and follow ergonomic principles
d. Product handling and storage processes are evaluated to minimise product damage, contamination and stock losses
e. Warehouse layout is checked to confirm that it remains sufficiently flexible to meet changing storage and handling requirements
f. Adequate provision is made for maintenance and cleaning g. Appropriate reporting systems are established and used to maintain data for
the design of improved facilities and systems
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
240
Range Of Variables
PLAN AND MAINTAIN WAREHOUSE LAYOUTS AND INVENTORY LOCATIONS
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant Australian and international regulations, standards and codes of practice
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and who provide leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in transport,
warehousing, storage and distribution industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night an any weather conditions d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site locations d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Warehouse or storage facility may be purpose designed or adapted for particular purpose
f. Layout and inventory locations may be planned for short or long terms g. Planning for refurbishment of existing warehouse or storage facilities may be
constrained by structural, regulatory or safety issues h. Consultative processes may involve:
h.1. employees, supervisors and managers h.2. customers and suppliers h.3. contractors h.4. relevant authorities, government departments and institutions h.5. representatives of other enterprises and organisations h.6. industrial relations and OHS specialists h.7. other professional or technical staff
i. Communications systems may involve: i.1. fixed and mobile telephone i.2. radio i.3. fax i.4. email i.5. electronic data transfer of information i.6. mail and internal memo
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
241
Range of Variables (continued)
PLAN AND MAINTAIN WAREHOUSE LAYOUTS AND INVENTORY LOCATIONS
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
j. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: j.1. company procedures j.2. enterprise procedures j.3. organisational procedures j.4. established procedures
3. Sources of information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. Australian codes of practice and regulations relevant to business unit
operations a.2. workplace policies and operating procedures a.3. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.4. supplier and/or client instructions a.5. relevant Australian Standards, criteria and certification requirements a.6. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications a.7. quality assurance standards and procedures a.8. emergency procedures a.9. relevant competency standards and training materials a.10. QA plans, data and document control a.11. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable regulations and legislation may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice relevant to warehouse operations a.2. relevant codes and regulations for the storage of hazardous substances
and dangerous goods, where applicable a.3. relevant Australian Standards and certification requirements a.4. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.5. relevant State/Territory environmental protection legislation a.6. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.7. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.8. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
242
Evidence Guide
PLAN AND MAINTAIN WAREHOUSE LAYOUTS AND INVENTORY LOCATIONS
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. apply leadership skills to the completion of planning and reorganisation
of warehouse layouts a.2. suggest improvements to warehouse operations and negotiate changes a.3. identify space, safety and security requirements a.4. design storage zones a.5. evaluate warehouse utilisation a.6. resolve issues surrounding effective and efficient storage of goods a.7. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.8. develop effective documentation and inventory systems
2. Interdependent
assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Australian and international regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements relevant to warehouse activities
b. Relevant OHS and environmental procedures and regulations c. Workplace policies and processes for the planning and maintenance of
warehouse layouts and inventory locations d. Problems that may occur when planning and maintaining warehouse layouts
and inventory locations and action that can be taken to report or resolve the problems
e. Hazards and risks that may arise during the planning and maintenance of warehouse layouts and inventory locations and ways of controlling the risks involved
f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: f.1. workplace policies, plans and priorities f.2. information on warehouse throughput and storage requirements for
inventory f.3. focus of operation of warehouse systems, resources, management and
workplace operating systems f.4. quality and customer service standards, policies and procedures f.5. application of relevant Australian and international standards and
associated certification requirements f.6. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.7. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.8. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills g. Ability to:
g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to workplace activities
g.2. access, read and interpret technical data, regulatory requirements, plans and layouts, and workplace policies and procedures
g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the planning and maintenance of warehouse layouts and inventory locations
g.4. identify opportunities for improvements to services, resource allocation and use
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
243
Evidence Guide (continued)
PLAN AND MAINTAIN WAREHOUSE LAYOUTS AND INVENTORY LOCATIONS
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g.5. apply strategies to implement continuous improvement processes g.6. provide leadership to others g.7. select and apply appropriate workplace technology, information systems
and procedures a.8. select and use computer aided drawing software programs a.9. maintain workplace records and documentation g.10. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to plan and maintain warehouse layouts and inventory locations, and/or
a.2. plan and maintain warehouse layouts and inventory locations in an appropriate operational transport, warehousing, storage and/or distribution context involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. planning and reorganising warehouse layouts a.2. suggesting improvements to warehouse operations and negotiating
changes a.3. identifying space, safety and security requirements a.4. designing storage zones a.5. evaluating warehouse utilisation a.6. resolving issues surrounding effective and efficient storage of goods a.7. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information a.8. developing effective documentation and inventory systems
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including customer service,
quality assurance, security and housekeeping procedures) b.4. issue resolution procedures b.5. standards and guidelines relating to the safe use of vehicles, machinery
and equipment c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified incidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
244
Evidence Guide (continued)
PLAN AND MAINTAIN WAREHOUSE LAYOUTS AND INVENTORY LOCATIONS
6. Context for
assessment a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a registered training
organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the registered training organisation in a workplace simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
245
TDTP1198B DEVELOP AND EVALUATE STRATEGIES FOR TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION ENTERPRISES
Field P Business Planning DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to develop and evaluate strategies for transport and distribution enterprises in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures. This includes analysing the enterprise's internal and external operating environment, developing strategies to maximise outcomes for the enterprise, implementing and evaluating strategies, and responding to changes within the transport and distribution environment.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Analyse the enterprise’s internal and external operating environment
a. The effectiveness of the enterprise’s principal services, products and competitive advantages are identified and confirmed through market analysis
b. External factors, including legislative requirements, changes to technology, domestic and international market variability and political constraints impinging upon the operation of the enterprise are researched and analysed
c. Impending changes to internal operations or the external environment are determined
d. An analysis is undertaken of the enterprise’s capacity to operate within the defined environment, outlining opportunities to improve market share and/or positioning
e. Recommendations for changes to workplace structure, systems, procedures, workforce composition, market orientation and the like are generated and documented in consideration of internal and external analysis and the enterprise’s goals and values
2. Develop strategies
to maximise outcomes for the enterprise
a. Recommendations for changes to the enterprise’s operations are assessed for feasibility and for cost-benefit from both a short- and long-term perspective
b. Capability and capacity of the enterprise to facilitate changes within financial and time constraints are assessed and documented
c. Recommendations and supporting documentation are circulated for agreement to relevant personnel
d. Strategies to implement agreed recommendations are generated and documented
e. Support processes, including the allocation of human, physical and financial resources, the designation of timelines and the setting of the culture and climate of the enterprise, are undertaken
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
246
3. Implement and evaluate strategies
a. Performance benchmarks for measuring the effectiveness of the change strategies are implemented
b. Responsibilities for implementing the change strategies are clearly defined and allocated to designated personnel
c. Implementation processes are monitored and, where required, adjustments to the strategies are made
d. Performance of the enterprise in relation to the identified benchmarks is regularly monitored and reviewed and adjustments made where required
e. Individuals/teams are kept informed of progress in the implementation of change
4. Respond to
changes within the transport and distribution environment
a. The nature, extent and impact of any issues or changes upon the operations of the enterprise are identified
b. Relevant information is processed to establish priorities and responses for dealing with issues or changes
c. Strategies are generated/adjusted and controlled to meet changes in the transport and distribution environment
d. Liaison is initiated and maintained with organisations/individuals affected by changed operational practice
e. Actions undertaken are clearly documented and filed
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
247
Range Of Variables DEVELOP AND EVALUATE STRATEGIES FOR TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION ENTERPRISES VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work activities must be carried out in compliance with the relevant Australian and international regulations, standards and codes of practice
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and who provide leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the warehousing,
storage, transport and distribution industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Transport and distribution operations may be conducted by day or night in all
weather conditions d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site locations d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Analysis of strategic directions for enterprise will entail short- and long-term perspectives
f. Planning information may be generated from a wide range of sources, including analysts, authorities, clients, State and Commonwealth governments, local governments, industry forums, peak industry bodies, and internal personnel
g. Strategies must consider issues such as workplace productivity, culture, technology implications, cost-benefit, and issues of change management
h. External consultants may be engaged in development, implementation and evaluation processes
i. Workplace systems may include: i.1. transport and distribution policies, protocols and procedures i.2. communications systems i.3. scope of workplace operations i.4. authorities and permits i.5. hours of operation i.6. relevant regulations
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
248
Range of Variables (continued) DEVELOP AND EVALUATE STRATEGIES FOR TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION ENTERPRISES VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
j. Consultative processes may involve: j.1. employees, supervisors and managers j.2. suppliers and current or potential clients j.3. contractors j.4. market analysts j.5. relevant authorities, government departments and institutions j.6. representatives of other enterprises and organisations j.7. industrial relations and OHS specialists j.8. other professional, maintenance or technical staff
k. Communications systems may involve: k.1. fixed and mobile telephone k.2. radio k.3. fax k.4. email k.5. electronic data transfer of information k.6. mail and internal memo k.7. RF systems
l. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: l.1. company procedures l.2. enterprise procedures l.3. organisational procedures l.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to
workplace operations a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage, transfer and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including the ADG and IDG Code
a.3. workplace operating procedures and policies a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of transport
options a.6. supplier and/or client instructions a.7. audit reports concerning quality, OHS, environment, operations,
customer service a.8. Australian and international standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.9. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications a.10. quality assurance standards and procedures a.11. emergency procedures a.12. relevant competency standards and training materials a.13. QA plans, data and document control a.14. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
249
Range of Variables (continued) DEVELOP AND EVALUATE STRATEGIES FOR TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION ENTERPRISES VARIABLE SCOPE
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice relevant to business operations a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage, transport and transfer of dangerous goods and hazardous substances
a.3. relevant Australian and international standards and certification requirements
a.4. relevant State/Territory trade practices legislation a.5. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.6. relevant State/Territory environmental protection legislation a.7. relevant licence or permit requirements and associated regulations a.8. patent or copyright arrangements a.9. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.10. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.11. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
250
Evidence Guide DEVELOP AND EVALUATE STRATEGIES FOR TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION ENTERPRISES 1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. select appropriate strategies to develop, implement and evaluate
strategic directions for an enterprise a.2. access relevant information including identification of circumstances
where external expertise is required a.3. apply techniques to encourage appropriate participation of team/group
members and relevant external expertise in the development of the strategic plans
a.4. locate, interpret and apply relevant information to inform business plan formulation and evaluation
a.5. improve customer/client service and work effectively with others to develop and implement strategic plans
a.6. institute effective performance indicators to evaluate the outcomes of current and future strategic plans for an enterprise
2. Interdependent
assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Australian and international regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements relevant to workplace operations
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace processes for development and evaluation of strategies for an
enterprise d. Problems that may occur during the development and evaluation of
strategies for an enterprise and action that can be taken to report or resolve the problems
e. Hazards and risk that may exist when developing and evaluating strategies for an enterprise and ways of controlling the risks involved
f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include: f.1. focus of operation of competitor and internal business systems,
resources, management and workplace operating systems f.2. current and future market initiatives including new technologies,
products and processes f.3. market and other external environmental factors including the regulatory
environment f.4. organisational strengths and weaknesses including the competencies of
individuals in the team/group f.5. application of relevant Australian and international standards and
associated certification requirements f.6. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.7. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.8. relevant workplace documentation procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
251
Evidence Guide (continued) DEVELOP AND EVALUATE STRATEGIES FOR TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION ENTERPRISES 3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g. Ability to: g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to workplace
activities g.2. access, read and interpret business and market data, regulatory
requirements and other planning information g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the development and
evaluation of strategies for an enterprise g.4. provide leadership to others g.5. plan and organise business systems and activities g.6. select and apply appropriate technology, information systems and
procedures a.7. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to develop and evaluate strategies for a transport and distribution enterprise, and/or
a.2. develop and evaluate strategies for transport and distribution enterprises in an appropriate range of transport, warehousing, storage and distribution business contexts involving relevant market intelligence, systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. selecting appropriate strategies to develop, implement and evaluate strategic directions for the enterprise
a.2. accessing relevant information including identification of circumstances where external expertise is required
a.3. applying techniques to encourage appropriate participation of team/group members and relevant external expertise in the development of the strategic plans
a.4. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information to inform business plan formulation and evaluation
a.5. improving customer/client service and working effectively with others to develop and implement strategic plans
a.6. instituting effective performance indicators to evaluate the outcomes of current and future strategic plans for the enterprise
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including quality assurance,
customer service, security and housekeeping procedures) b.4. issue resolution procedures b.5. standards and guidelines relating to the safe use of vehicles, machinery
and equipment c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
252
Evidence Guide (continued) DEVELOP AND EVALUATE STRATEGIES FOR TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION ENTERPRISES 5. Consistency in
performance (continued)
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified incidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a registered training organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the registered training organisation in a workplace simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
253
TDTP1201A PLAN TRAIN SUPPORT ACTIVITIES Field P Business Planning DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to plan train support activities in accordance with workplace procedures and the requirements of relevant safeworking regulations and codes of practice. This covers the integrated planning of all work to be performed and resources required for freight or passenger train operations at terminals, stations and interchanges to achieve train schedules. It includes confirming train details; identifying the shunting and marshalling requirements; identifying any freight handling and transport equipment requirements; identifying any required freight forwarding and storage details; identifying passenger/freight support activities; and developing an overall integrated work plan. Persons achieving competence in this unit will need to fulfil the relevant requirements of the codes of practice and regulations of the States/Territories concerned, including the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network in situations where operations are carried out on that network.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Confirm train details
a. Train timetables are continuously monitored and updated to confirm running times and schedules
b. Train arrival, departure and running times are confirmed for work planning purposes
c. Train consist, including rolling stock types and details, are confirmed for either freight loading/unloading requirements or passenger entraining and detraining requirements
d. Alterations to train configuration are identified for work schedule purposes
2. Identify shunting and marshalling requirements
a. Rolling stock details and sequence are confirmed for required train consists b. Train consists are confirmed with respect to customer requirements in
accordance with workplace requirements c. Details of rolling stock shunting movements are established to assemble all
planned trains d. Train marshalling requirements are identified and final train consist confirmed
3. Identify freight handling and transport equipment requirements
a. Train consist details are evaluated to identify appropriate freight handling, manual handling, dangerous goods and transport equipment requirements
b. Arrangements are made to ensure required freight handling and transport equipment is serviceable and available when required
c. Personnel, freight handling and transport equipment requirements are monitored and amended to accommodate any changes to load requirements
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
254
4. Identify required freight forwarding and storage details
a. Customer's freight forwarding or freight storage requirements are established with the customer
b. Suitable freight forwarding or freight storage arrangements are made and conveyed promptly to the customer
c. Freight forwarding and freight storage arrangements are confirmed with the appropriate freight booking personnel at the receiving terminal
d. Documentation recording the freight forwarding or freight storage arrangements is accurately completed and forwarded to the appropriate personnel and customer
5. Identify
passenger/freight support activities
a. Activities and documentation associated with the reception, embarkation, conveyance, and disembarkation of passengers are identified in accordance with workplace procedures
b. Freight receiving and customer activities are established. c. Financial and commercial requirements for freight transport are implemented in
accordance with workplace policies and procedures d. Contingency plans for passenger support activities are identified
6. Develop integrated work plan
a. Passenger/freight movement activities are identified taking into account operational requirements and customer needs
b. All activities are analysed to ensure appropriate equipment and personnel are available and allocated appropriately
c. Arrangements for the integrated coordination of equipment and personnel are implemented
d. Contingency plans required to meet unexpected events are identified and required resources are established
e. Coordination mechanisms are implemented within the overall work plan f. Integrated schedule of activities and activity completion times are established
and reporting procedures are implemented g. Relevant OHS requirements are identified and included in the planning
considerations for passenger operations or for loading and unloading of freight
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
255
Range Of Variables
PLAN TRAIN SUPPORT ACTIVITIES
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be carried out in compliance with the relevant requirements of the codes of practice and regulations of the States/Territories concerned, including the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network in situations where operations are carried out on that network
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and who provide leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the Australian rail
system b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night in all relevant weather conditions d. Rolling stock may include all forms of rail cars, wagons and carriages in service
within the Australian rail system e. All documented activities required to be undertaken within a specified
timeframe f. Coordination mechanisms may include those communication and related
activities necessary to link the arrival and departure of passengers with events or activities other than the train movement, such as meeting of other trains or different forms of transport
g. Planning of shunting and marshalling operations may include the application of workplace policies and procedures for shunting and marshalling including appropriate safeworking systems and requirements
h. Passenger support activities may include requirements for entraining, detraining and care of passengers and related documentation to complete their movement on scheduled trains
i. Freight support activities may include requirements for movement, storage, loading, unloading and documentation between release of freight by or to customers and its movement on scheduled trains
j. Train timetables may include: j.1. computer screen form j.2. printed booklets j.3. graphs j.4. leaflets j.5. other timetables required by rail organisations
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
256
Range of Variables (continued)
PLAN TRAIN SUPPORT ACTIVITIES
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
k. Freight handling and transportation equipment may include any equipment used by the organisation for freight handling in the terminal, yard or station
l. Storage arrangements may include all types of storage locations and facilities used by both the organisation and its customers
m. Freight customer support activities may include the provision of vehicle reception and parking facilities and services
n. Consultative processes may involve: n.1 employees, supervisors and managers n.2 current or potential clients n.3 relevant authorities, government departments and institutions n.4. representatives of other enterprises and organisations related to the
international transfer of freight n.5. industrial relations and OHS specialists n.6. other professional, maintenance or technical staff
o. Communications systems may involve: o.1. fixed and mobile telephone o.2. radio o.3. fax o.4. email o.5. electronic data transfer of information o.6. mail, forms and internal memos
p. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: p.1. company procedures p.2. enterprise procedures p.3. organisational procedures p.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. relevant State/Territory codes of practice and safeworking system
requirements a.2. the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network in situations
where operations are carried out on that network a.3. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling, storage and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including the ADG Code
a.4. workplace operating procedures and policies a.5. all forms of documentation used by the organisation for planning train
support activities including passenger/freight booking and follow-up documentation
a.6. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction documentation
a.7. supplier and/or client instructions a.8. Australian and International standards, criteria and certification
requirements
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
257
Range of Variables (continued)
PLAN TRAIN SUPPORT ACTIVITIES
VARIABLE SCOPE
3. Sources of information/ documents
(continued)
a.9. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed communications
a.10. quality assurance standards and procedures a.11. emergency procedures a.12. relevant competency standards and training materials a.13. QA plans, data and document control a.14. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. relevant State/Territory codes of practice and safeworking system
requirements a.2. the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network in situations
where operations are carried out on that network a.3. Australian regulations and codes of practice for the handling and transfer
of dangerous goods and hazardous substances a.4. relevant Australian Standards and certification requirements a.5. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.6. relevant State/Territory environmental protection legislation a.7. relevant licence or permit requirements and associated regulations a.8. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.9. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.10. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
258
Evidence Guide
PLAN TRAIN SUPPORT ACTIVITIES
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. confirm train details a.2. identify shunting and marshalling requirements a.3. identify freight handling and transport equipment requirements a.4 identify required freight forwarding and storage details a.5. identify passenger/freight support activities a.6. develop an integrated work plan a.7. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.8. maintain workplace records and documentation a.9. communicate effectively with customers, staff and others
2. Interdependent
assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant sections of State/Territory codes of practice and safeworking system requirements including the Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network in situations where operations are carried out on that network
b. Relevant OHS and environmental procedures and regulations c. Workplace policies and processes for the planning of train support activities d. Problems that may occur when planning train support activities and action
that can be taken to report or resolve the problems e. Hazards and risks that may arise during the planning of train support
activities and ways of controlling the risks involved f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include:
f.1. workplace policies, plans and priorities f.2. focus of operation of train support systems, resources, management and
workplace operating systems f.3. organisation's computer assisted planning program(s) f.4. relevant standards and codes of practice for manual handling f.5. rolling stock, wagon/carriage types and details f.6. station and interchange operations f.7. storage facilities and corresponding transport arrangements f.8. terminal/yard and station operations f.9. timetables and schedules f.10. passenger booking procedures f.11. quality and customer service standards, policies and procedures f.12. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.13. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.14. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills g. Ability to:
g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to workplace activities
g.2. access, read and interpret technical data, timetables, rosters, regulatory requirements, and workplace policies and procedures
g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the planning of train support activities
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
259
Evidence Guide (continued)
PLAN TRAIN SUPPORT ACTIVITIES
3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g.4. identify opportunities for improvements to services, resource allocation and use
g.5. apply strategies to implement continuous improvement processes g.6. provide leadership to others g.7. communicate and negotiate with others g.8. select and apply appropriate workplace technology, information systems
and procedures a.9. maintain workplace records and documentation g.10. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to plan train support activities, and/or
a.2. plan train support activities in an appropriate range of operational contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. confirming train details a.2. identifying shunting and marshalling requirements a.3. identifying freight handling and transport equipment requirements a.4. identifying required freight forwarding and storage details a.5. identifying passenger/freight support activities a.6. developing an integrated work plan
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. State/Territory codes of practice and safeworking system requirements b.2. Code of Practice for the Defined Interstate Rail Network in situations
where operations are carried out on that network b.3. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.4. hazard control policies and procedures b.5. operational procedures and work instructions (including customer
service, quality assurance, security and housekeeping procedures) b.6. issue resolution procedures b.7. standards and guidelines relating to the safe use of vehicles, machinery
and equipment c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified incidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
260
Evidence Guide (continued)
PLAN TRAIN SUPPORT ACTIVITIES
6. Context for
assessment a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a registered training
organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the registered training organisation in a workplace simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
261
TDTQ298B SET AND ACHIEVE BUDGET Field Q Financial Management DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to set and achieve a workplace budget in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures. This includes planning the budget requirements, monitoring the budget and taking appropriate corrective action, monitoring expenditure, and reviewing and appropriately modifying the budget if necessary.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Plan budget requirements
a. Financial flows for budgetary periods are planned and scheduled in accordance with workplace requirements
b. Information on costs and resource utilisation is fully assessed and correctly interpreted
c. Effective action is taken to reduce costs and enhance value to customer and/or workplace
2. Monitor budget
and take corrective action
a. Corrective action is taken in response to actual or potential significant deviations from financial plans
b. Where a budget under or overspend is likely to occur, the appropriate people are informed with minimum delay
c. Prompt, corrective action is taken where necessary in response to actual or potential significant deviations from budget
3. Monitor
expenditure a. Expenditure made is within agreed limits, does not compromise future
spending requirements and conforms to the workplace's policy and procedures b. Requests for expenditure outside limits of responsibility are referred to
appropriate persons c. Where necessary, expenditure is phased in accordance with a planned time
scale
4. Review and modify budget
a. Actual income and expenditure is checked against agreed budgets at regular, appropriate intervals
b. Any necessary authority for changes in allocation between budget heads is obtained in advance of requirement
c. Modifications made to agreed budgets during the accounting period are consistent with agreed guidelines and correctly authorised
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
262
Range Of Variables
SET AND ACHIEVE BUDGET
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and financial codes of practice
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and who provide leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments and involves a
leadership role in the warehousing, storage, transport and distribution industries, for example: a.1. in the warehouse and/or depot a.2. in the vehicle on the road a.3. at the client’s workplace a.4. in team and autonomous working situations
b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Services, products, risks, work systems and requirements potentially vary in different sections of the workplace
f. Budgets may be developed for component parts of operations or for specialised service provision
g. Budgets are developed within the context of workplace policies and procedures h. Consultative processes may involve:
h.1. employees, supervisors and managers h.2. contractors h.3. suppliers and current or potential clients h.4. financial managers and accountants h.5. relevant authorities, government departments and institutions h.6. representatives of other enterprises and organisations related to the
international transfer of freight h.7. industrial relations and OHS specialists h.8. other professional, maintenance and technical staff
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
263
Range of Variables (continued)
SET AND ACHIEVE BUDGET
VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
i. Communications systems may involve: i.1. fixed and mobile telephone i.2. radio i.3. fax i.4. email i.5. electronic data transfer of information f.6. mail, forms and internal memos
j. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: j.1. company procedures j.2. enterprise procedures j.3. organisational procedures j.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. codes of practice and regulations relevant to the budgetary control a.2. budgetary documentation a.3. workplace operating procedures and policies a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. supplier and/or client instructions a.6. Australian and international standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.7. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications a.8. quality assurance standards and procedures a.9. emergency procedures a.10. relevant competency standards and training materials a.11. QA plans, data and document control a.12. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice relevant to budgetary control a.2. relevant Australian standards and certification requirements a.3. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.4. relevant State/Territory environmental protection legislation a.5. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.6. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.7. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
264
Evidence Guide
SET AND ACHIEVE BUDGET
1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. plan budget requirements a.2. monitor budget and take corrective action a.3. monitor expenditure a.4. review and modify budget a.5. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.6. work effectively with others to set and achieve a workplace budget a.7. maintain budgetary records and documentation
2. Interdependent
assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements b. Relevant OHS and environmental procedures and regulations c. Workplace processes for setting and achieving budgets d. Problems that may occur when setting and achieving budgets and action
that can be taken to report or resolve the problems e. Risks that may exist when setting and achieving budgets and ways of
controlling the risks involved f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include:
f.1. focus of operation of budgetary systems, resources, management and workplace operating systems
f.2. accountancy practices relevant to budgetary control f.3. budgetary procedures and policies f.4. budgetary control systems f.5. limits of authorised expenditure f.6. quality and customer service standards, policies and procedures f.7. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.8. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.9. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills g. Ability to:
g.1. access, read and interpret budgetary documents, financial statements and reports and workplace policies and procedures
g.2. apply basic accounting principles to budgetary processes g.3. apply calculation skills when setting and achieving budgets g.4. maintain budgetary records and documentation g.5. provide leadership to others g.6. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to workplace
activities g.7. identify and solve problems that may arise when setting and achieving
budgets g.8. select and apply appropriate technology, information systems and
procedures g.9. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
265
Evidence Guide (continued)
SET AND ACHIEVE BUDGET
4. Resource
implications a. Access is required to opportunities to:
a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to set and achieve a budget, and/or
a.2. set and achieve budgets in an appropriate range of operational contexts involving relevant budgetary processes, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. planning budget requirements a.2. monitoring budget and taking corrective action a.3. monitoring expenditure a.4. reviewing and modifying budget a.5. locating, interpreting and applying relevant information a.6. working effectively with others to set and achieve a workplace budget
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions b.4. issue resolution procedures
c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified budgetary problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES
Collect, Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 2 2 2 3 2 2
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
266
TDTQ598B SET, MONITOR AND EVALUATE BUDGETS FOR BUSINESS UNITS Field Q Financial Management DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to set, monitor and evaluate budgets for business units in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures. This includes evaluating data for budgets, drafting the budgets, negotiating the budgets, and implementing and monitoring budget performance
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Evaluate data for budget
a. Operating plan for business unit is examined to identify critical budget parameters
b. Proposed budget target figures are identified to meet profit and fixed cost requirements
c. Previous budget and actual revenue and expenditure figures are compared and reasons for performance figures are analysed and recorded
d. External factors which may influence performance are identified e. Reasons for variations to targets over actual performance are considered and
used to inform budget decision making process
2. Draft budget a. Budget documentation is prepared in accordance with enterprise policy and procedures
b. Estimates of costs and benefits are supported by valid, relevant information, recommendations are supported by realistic alternatives and contain accurate, clear proposals
c. Budget papers indicate net benefits over designated timeframe and related changes in operations
d. Budget documentation is clear and concise and provides information in appropriate language to inform management and employees
e. Draft budget is circulated to stakeholders for information and feedback f. Feedback is considered and redrafting process and contentious issues are
clarified by further explanation
3. Negotiate budgets a. Budget negotiations are conducted within appropriate agreed timeline and in a manner likely to promote ongoing cooperation
b. Budget negotiations reflect the overall enterprise policies and objectives relevant to the manager’s area of responsibility
c. Clarification is promptly sought where areas of uncertainty or disagreement occur
d. All relevant personnel are promptly and accurately informed of budget decisions
e. Budget implications and interpretation are explained and the process for implementation developed in consultation with employees and management
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
267
4. Implement and monitor budget performance
a. Objectives and targets for individual zones or operations are developed in active consultation with team members and management
b. Implementation strategies and objectives accurately reflect the overall workplace policy
c. Strategies and objectives are attainable, cost efficient and realistic within the designated timeframe
d. Implementation process allows for continuous improvement processes e. Constraints are identified and alternative strategies are developed f. Trends in actual income and expenditure are regularly compared to budget
targets and corrective action taken promptly when deviations from budget occur
g. Necessary changes to agreed budget are negotiated in advance of requirement
h. Modifications to existing budgets are documented and authorised according to enterprise policy
i. Information on (any revised) targets, implementation strategies and budget performance is regularly provided to management and employees
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
268
Range Of Variables
SET, MONITOR AND EVALUATE BUDGETS FOR BUSINESS UNITS VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards and financial codes of practice
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and who provide leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the warehousing,
storage, transport and distribution industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site locations d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Services, products, risks, work systems and requirements potentially vary in different sections of the workplace
f. Budgets may be developed for component parts of operations or for specialised service provision
g. Budgets are developed within the context of enterprise policies and procedures h. Consultative processes may involve:
h.1. employees, supervisors and managers h.2. contractors h.3. suppliers and current or potential clients h.4. financial managers, accountants h.5. relevant authorities, government departments and institutions h.6. representatives of other enterprises and organisations related to the
international transfer of freight h.7. industrial relations and OHS specialists h.8. other professional, maintenance and technical staff
i. Communications systems may involve: i.1. fixed and mobile telephone i.2. radio i.3. fax i.4. email i.5. electronic data transfer of information f.6. mail, forms and internal memos
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
269
Range of Variables (continued)
SET, MONITOR AND EVALUATE BUDGETS FOR BUSINESS UNITS VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
j. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: j.1. company procedures j.2. enterprise procedures j.3. organisational procedures j.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. codes of practice and regulations relevant to the budgetary control a.2. budgetary documentation a.3. workplace operating procedures and policies a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. supplier and/or client instructions a.6. Australian and international standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.7. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications a.8. quality assurance standards and procedures a.9. emergency procedures a.10. relevant competency standards and training materials a.11. QA plans, data and document control a.12. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice relevant to budgetary control a.2. relevant Australian standards and certification requirements a.3. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.4. relevant State/Territory environmental protection legislation a.5. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.6. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.7. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
270
Evidence Guide
SET, MONITOR AND EVALUATE BUDGETS FOR BUSINESS UNITS 1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. prepare a budget with appropriate clarity and accuracy a.2. apply leadership skills to the completion of budget processes including
the allocation of resources, taking into account workplace policy a.3. suggest improvements to work operations and negotiate changes to
implement budget forecasts a.4. mediate and resolve issues surrounding changes in resource allocation,
maximising positive outcomes for the organisation and the individuals within it
a.5. apply techniques to encourage appropriate participation of team/group members and external relevant expertise in the budget process
a.6. identify requirements of the budget and supporting documentation including evaluation measures
a.7. research, interpret, monitor and apply relevant information from a range of sources to inform the budget process
2. Interdependent
assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Relevant Australian and international regulations, codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international freight regulations
b. Relevant OHS and environmental procedures and regulations c. Workplace processes for the setting, monitoring and evaluation of budgets for
business units d. Problems that may occur during the setting, monitoring and evaluating of
budgets and action that can be taken to report or resolve the problems e. Risks that may exist when setting, monitoring and evaluating budgets and
ways of controlling the risks involved f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include:
f.1. focus of operation of budgetary systems, resources, management and workplace operating systems
f.2. accountancy practices relevant to budgetary control f.3. contacts and sources of information/documentation needed when
setting, monitoring and evaluating budgets for business units f.4. market awareness f.5. focus of operation of workplace component strengths and weaknesses
and the strengths and weaknesses of competitors f.6. quality and customer service standards, policies and procedures f.7. application of relevant Australian Standards and associated certification
requirements f.8. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.9. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.10. coaching and mentoring approaches to support team members to share
knowledge and skills f.11. relevant workplace documentation procedures
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
271
Evidence Guide (continued)
SET, MONITOR AND EVALUATE BUDGETS FOR BUSINESS UNITS 3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g. Ability to: g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to workplace
activities g.2. access, read and interpret financial data, budgetary reports and
workplace policies and procedures g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise when setting, monitoring and
evaluating budgets for business units g.4. provide leadership to others g.5. plan and organise budgetary systems and activities g.6. select and apply appropriate technology, information systems and
procedures a.7. maintain workplace records and documentation g.8. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to set, monitor and evaluate budgets for business units, and/or
a.2. set, monitor and evaluate budgets for business units in an appropriate range of operational contexts involving relevant budgetary systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. preparing a budget a.2. applying leadership skills to the completion of budget processes a.3. suggesting improvements to work operations and negotiating changes to
implement budget forecasts a.4. mediating and resolving issues surrounding changes in resource
allocation, maximising positive outcomes for the organisation and the individuals within it
a.5. applying techniques to encourage appropriate participation of team/group members and external relevant expertise in the budget process
a.6. identifying requirements of the budget and supporting documentation including evaluation measures
a.7. researching, interpreting, monitoring and applying relevant information from a range of sources to inform the budget process
b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including: b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including security and
housekeeping procedures) b.4. issue resolution procedures b.5. standards and guidelines relating to the safe use of equipment
c. Consistently considers when allocating tasks competency requirements, size of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified budgetary problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
272
Evidence Guide (continued)
SET, MONITOR AND EVALUATE BUDGETS FOR BUSINESS UNITS 5. Consistency in
performance (continued)
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 3 2 3 3 2
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
273
TDTR398B NEGOTIATE A CONTRACT Field Q Financial Management DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to contract transport and distribution services in accordance with relevant regulatory requirements and workplace procedures. This includes negotiating contract with contractor, finalising the contract negotiations, and completing all enterprise contract requirements.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Negotiate contract with contractor
a. Requirements of the contract are clearly documented and understood by the relevant parties
b. Areas of ambiguity or concern are clarified and resolved c. Negotiations are undertaken with selected contractor for the contracting of
required goods/services on a ‘without prejudice’ basis d. Conditions for service and/or supply of goods/services are agreed between the
enterprise and the contractor including the determination of key performance indicators
e. Alternative contractors are negotiated with if agreement is unable to be reached with preferred contractor
f. Contract negotiations conform to established workplace requirements and relevant legislation
2. Complete contract
negotiations a. Contract documentation is drafted in accordance with relevant legislation,
workplace procedures and negotiated conditions of service and supply b. Technical support in the drafting of contracts is accessed where required c. Contract documentation is signed and exchanged between the relevant parties
3. Complete enterprise contract requirements
a. Documentation systems are established to ensure traceability of orders and financial transactions
b. Workplace systems that require interaction with contractors are identified and actioned
c. Quality assurance procedures for supplied goods/services are initiated d. Contract and ancillary documentation is completed and stored in accordance
with workplace procedures and, where applicable, regulatory requirements
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
274
Range Of Variables
NEGOTIATE A CONTRACT VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant regulations, standards, legal requirements and codes of practice
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in warehousing,
storage, transport and distribution industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Services, products, risks, work systems and requirements potentially vary in different sections of the enterprise
f. Contracts may be for singular or continuous supply of goods and/or services g. Document/data interchange may be electronic or paper-based h. Clients/customers/suppliers may include domestic and international
contractors, corporations, individuals and government agencies i. Contract must conform to relevant legislation in regards to issues of probity and
fair dealings j. Consultative processes may involve:
j.1. employees, supervisors and managers j.2. contractors j.3. suppliers and current or potential clients j.4. legal representatives, financial managers, accountants j.5. relevant authorities, government departments and institutions j.6. representatives of other enterprises and organisations related to the
international transfer of freight j.7. industrial relations and OHS specialists j.8. other professional, maintenance and technical staff
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
275
Range of Variables (continued)
NEGOTIATE A CONTRACT VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
k. Communications systems may involve: k.1. fixed and mobile telephone k.2. radio k.3. fax k.3. email k.4. electronic data transfer of information f.5. mail, forms and internal memos
l. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: l.1. company procedures l.2. enterprise procedures l.3. organisational procedures l.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. codes of practice and regulations relevant to the transport and distribution
contractual arrangements a.2. legal and contract documentation a.3. workplace operating procedures and policies a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. supplier and/or client instructions a.7. Australian and International standards, criteria and certification
requirements a.8. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications a.9. quality assurance standards and procedures a.10. emergency procedures a.11. relevant competency standards and training materials a.12. QA plans, data and document control a.13. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice relevant to contractual arrangements a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling and transfer of dangerous goods and hazardous substances a.3. relevant financial regulations a.4. Australian and international standards and certification requirements a.5. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.6. relevant State/Territory environmental protection legislation a.7. relevant licence or permit requirements and associated regulations a.8. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.9. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.10. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
276
Evidence Guide
NEGOTIATE A CONTRACT 1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. complete and formalise contract negotiations a.2. identify opportunities for improvements to supply operations and
negotiate changes with contractor a.3. mediate and resolve issues surrounding contracted supply of services,
equipment or goods, maximising positive outcomes for the organisation and the individuals within it
a.4. identify requirements of tasks and organise planning, job completion and evaluation stages
a.5. locate, interpret and apply relevant information a.6. provide customer/client service and work effectively with others a.7. maintain workplace records and documentation
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
a. Regulations, codes of practice and legal requirements relevant to contractual arrangements
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations c. Workplace procedures for the negotiation of a contract d. Problems that may occur during the negotiation of a contract and action that
can be taken to report or resolve the problems e. Risks that may exist when negotiating a contract and ways of controlling the
risks involved f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include:
f.1. focus of operation supply arrangements, resources, management and workplace operating systems
f.2. contract law f.3. contract formulation and negotiation f.4. workplace business policies and plans including procedures for
maintenance of confidentiality f.5. equipment applications, capacities, and configurations f.6. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.7. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.8. relevant contract documentation requirements
g. Ability to: g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to workplace
activities g.2. access, read and interpret contractual documents, regulatory
requirements and workplace policies and procedures g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise when negotiating a contract g.4. provide leadership to others g.5. plan and organise work activities g.6. select and apply appropriate technology and information systems a.7. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
277
Evidence Guide (continued)
NEGOTIATE A CONTRACT 4. Resource
implications a. Access is required to opportunities to:
a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to negotiate a contract, and/or
a.2. negotiate a contract in an appropriate range of operational transport, warehousing, storage and distribution contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. completing and formalising contract negotiations a.2. identifying opportunities for improvements to supply operations and
negotiating changes with contractor a.3. mediating and resolving issues surrounding contracted supply of
services, equipment or goods b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including:
b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international freight regulations
b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions b.4. issue resolution procedures
c. When allocating tasks consistently considers competency requirements, size of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified contractual problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
6. Context for assessment
a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 3 2 2 2 2 2
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
278
TDTU601A CONDUCT ENVIRONMENTAL AUDITS Field U Environment DESCRIPTION: This unit involves the skills and knowledge required to conduct an environmental audit in accordance with relevant environmental protection regulatory requirements and workplace procedures. This includes preparing for an environmental audit, scheduling an internal audit, conducting an environmental audit, documenting the findings, and reporting on the environmental audit results.
ELEMENT PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
1. Prepare for environmental audit
a. Relevant legislation, authority and enterprise requirements pertinent to the operations of the workplace, are identified and followed
b. Practices and facilities required to be audited are identified and implications of non-conformance established
c. Technical and/or calibration requirements for audits are noted and, where necessary, appropriate support personnel are identified
d. Work schedules are investigated to identify appropriate schedule for audit
2. Schedule internal audit
a. Audit timings are planned to ensure that relevant procedures are conducted within workplace agreed time intervals and timeframes
b. Audit frequency is adjusted to ensure minimal disruption to the workplace c. Contact is made with appropriate personnel and appointments for the audit are
made
3. Conduct environmental audit and document findings
a. Operational procedures and assessment methods for the environmental audit are confirmed with affected personnel
b. Observations and interviews are conducted with (any) required approved third party
c. Documentation of observations and interview responses is completed
4. Report environmental audit results
a. Outcomes of the audit process are compared to workplace procedures b. Audit results are discussed with relevant personnel c. Reports of non-compliance are documented including options for
environmental system improvements d. Reports are forwarded to appropriate personnel for action
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
279
Range Of Variables
CONDUCT ENVIRONMENTAL AUDITS VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context a. Work must be must be carried out in compliance with the relevant Australian regulations, standards and codes of practice
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area and the individuals and teams within it
e. The unit generally applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and provides leadership of others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment a. Work may be undertaken in various work environments in the warehousing,
storage, transport and distribution industries b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night in all weather conditions d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Services, products, risks, work systems and requirements potentially vary in different sectors of the warehousing, storage, transport and distribution industries
f. Environmental audits may be conducted as part of enterprise or site specific procedures
g. Audits may be conducted alone or in conjunction with other staff from the enterprise or external contractors
h. Audits may involve movement of processed materials, dangerous goods, hazardous substances, waste disposal, run-offs, etc.
i. Consultative processes may involve: i.1. employees, supervisors and managers i.2. customers and suppliers i.3. relevant environmental authorities and local government departments i.4. representatives of other enterprises and organisations related to the
international transfer of freight i.5. industrial relations and OHS specialists i.6. other professional, maintenance or technical staff
j. Communications systems may involve: j.1. fixed or mobile telephone j.2. radio j.3. fax j.4. email j.5. electronic data transfer of information j.6. mail, forms and internal memos
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
280
Range of Variables (continued)
CONDUCT ENVIRONMENTAL AUDITS VARIABLE SCOPE
2. Worksite environment
(continued)
k. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: k.1. company procedures k.2. enterprise procedures k.3. organisational procedures k.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. environmental codes of practice and regulations relevant to workplace
activities a.2. regulations and codes of practice for the handling, storage and transport
of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including the ADG Code where applicable
a.3. workplace operating procedures, instructions and policies relevant to environmental protection
a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction documentation
a.5. local government environmental protection policies and guidelines a.6. supplier and/or client instructions a.7. relevant Australian Standards, criteria and certification requirements a.8. manufacturer’s specifications and/or supplier's handling and storage
advice a.9. material safety data sheets a.10. communications technology equipment and oral, aural or signed
communications a.11. quality assurance standards and procedures a.12. emergency procedures a.13. relevant competency standards and training materials a.14. QA plans, data and document control a.15. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including
workplace agreements and awards
4. Applicable regulations and legislation
a. Applicable procedures and codes may include: a.1. relevant State/Territory and local government environmental protection
legislation and regulations a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the
handling and transfer of dangerous goods and hazardous substances a.3. relevant Australian and international standards and certification
requirements a.4. relevant State/Territory OHS legislation a.5. relevant licence or permit requirements and associated regulations a.6. relevant Workplace Relations legislation a.7. relevant Workers Compensation legislation a.8. Equal Opportunity, Equal Employment Opportunity and Affirmative Action
legislation
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
281
Evidence Guide
CONDUCT ENVIRONMENTAL AUDITS 1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. complete environmental audits, including the allocation and delegation of
tasks in accordance with workplace policy a.2. manage own work to achieve workplace goals and required results a.3. coordinate improvements to workplace environmental protection policies
and procedures a.4. apply techniques to encourage appropriate participation of employees
and, where appropriate, external expertise in the environmental audit system
a.5. identify requirements of tasks and organise, plan and evaluate the environmental audit
a.6. locate, interpret and apply information in relation to risks prevention and control measures
a.7. provide customer/client service and work effectively with others
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. This unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a worker's job
3. Required
knowledge and skills
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and regulations, including the ADG Code where applicable
c. Workplace processes for the conduct of an environmental audit d. Problems that may occur during the conduct of an environmental audit and
action that can be taken to report or resolve the problems e. Hazards that may exist in the conduct of an environmental audit and ways of
controlling the risks involved f. Operational knowledge and understanding may include:
f.1. focus of operation of workplace in relation to potential environmental risks and control/prevention measures
f.2. environmental risk management and control procedures f.3. audit procedures and compliance implementation strategies f.4. regulatory and guidance material on environmental safety f.5. workplace business policies and plans including procedures for
identification of non-compliance and best practice f.6. equipment applications, capacities, configurations, safety hazards and
control f.7. application of relevant Australian Standards and associated certification
requirements f.8. resource availability including the competencies of individuals in the
team/group f.9. understanding and knowledge of the application of current competencies
within functional activity f.10. relevant workplace documentation procedures
g. Ability to: g.1. prioritise work and coordinate self and others in relation to workplace
activities g.2. access, read and interpret technical data, regulatory requirements and
workplace policies and procedures g.3. identify and solve problems that may arise during the conduct of an
environmental audit
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
282
Evidence Guide (continued)
CONDUCT ENVIRONMENTAL AUDITS 3. Required
knowledge and skills
(continued)
g.4. provide leadership to others g.5. plan and organise environmental audit activities g.6. select and apply appropriate technology, information systems and
procedures a.7. modify activities to cater for variations in workplace contexts and
environment
4. Resource implications
a. Access is required to opportunities to: a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other real or
simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to conduct an environmental audit, and/or
a.2. conduct an environmental audit in an appropriate range of operational contexts involving relevant systems, personnel, equipment, work instructions and deadlines
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. completing environmental audits a.2. managing own work to achieve workplace goals and required results a.3. coordinating improvements to workplace environmental protection
policies and procedures a.4. applying techniques to encourage appropriate participation of employees
and, where appropriate, external expertise in the environmental audit system
a.5. identifying requirements of tasks and organising, planning and evaluating an environmental audit
a.6. locating, interpreting and applying information in relation to risk prevention and control measures
a.7. providing customer/client service and working effectively with others b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including:
b.1. relevant codes of practice and legislative requirements including local and international freight regulations
b.2. OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.3. workplace procedures and instructions (including security and
housekeeping procedures) b.4. issue resolution procedures b.5. standards and guidelines relating to the safe use of vehicles, machinery
and equipment c. When allocating tasks consistently considers competency requirements, size
of tasks, development opportunities and requirements of workplace policy and operating procedures and makes appropriate adjustments when required
d. Action is taken promptly to report and/or rectify any identified incidents and problems in accordance with relevant regulations and workplace procedures
e. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail g. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace,
including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
283
Evidence Guide (continued)
CONDUCT ENVIRONMENTAL AUDITS 6. Context for
assessment a. Assessment of this unit must be undertaken by a Registered Training
Organisation: a.1. As a minimum, assessment of knowledge must be conducted through
appropriate oral and/or written questioning a.2. Appropriate practical assessment must occur:
a.2.1. by the Registered Training Organisation in a workplace-simulated facility with relevant equipment, simulated job orders, work instructions and deadlines, and/or
a.2.2. in an appropriate work situation
KEY COMPETENCIES Collect,
Analyse & Organise
Information
Communicate Ideas &
Information
Plan & Organise Activities
Work with Others & in
Teams
Use Mathematical
Ideas & Techniques
Solve Problems
Use Technology
3 2 3 2 2 2 2
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
284
TRANSPORT AND DISTRIBUTION TRAINING PACKAGE
Logistics Management
Contextualisation Statement
The following Contextualisation Statement is provided as an aid to trainers, assessors and others who need to apply cross-industry standards and standards from other industries in Logistics Management contexts. It provides additional information in the form of a General Description, Range of Variables and an Evidence Guide to assist those interpreting the standards to understand critical aspects of the logistics management context, including the equipment, systems, facilities and procedures involved, and critical underpinning knowledge and skills particularly related to operational and safety management issues and compliance with relevant regulatory requirements and codes. The statement should be read in conjunction with the existing Ranges of Variables and Evidence Guides of the competency units concerned. The additional information should be used to ensure that training programs and assessment processes based on the standards, and designed for use with trainees and staff, relate meaningfully to the key aspects and requirements of the logistics management context.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF THE LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT CONTEXT
Logistics management is distinguished in a variety of ways:
• A focus on the timely, efficient, effective and legal movement, storage and delivery of goods across State/Territory, national and international borders
• Interpretation of a wide range of relevant international, Australian and State/Territory regulatory requirements and the and monitoring of compliance with those requirements
• Effective management of the risks involved in movement, storage and delivery of goods in both domestic and international contexts
• The effective use of a range of integrated multi-modal transport systems
• Use of a variety of integrated communications systems to ensure efficient, effective management of the movement, storage and delivery of consignments in accordance with customer requirements
• Safety of consigned goods and personnel is of central importance and is the focus of extensive international, national and State/Territory regulations
• Effective leadership and coordination of local and remote personnel involved in the cooperative management the movement, storage and delivery of consignments
• The use of appropriate systems for the tracking of consignments across State/Territory, national and international borders including the use of computerised systems and the interpretation, completion and filing of required documentation and information
• The individual and collaborative identification and resolution of a range of problems that may occur during the local and international movement, storage and delivery of goods
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
285
Range Of Variables
VARIABLE SCOPE
1. General context (as it applies to the competency unit concerned)
a. Work must be carried out in compliance with the relevant international, Australian and State/Territory regulations pertaining to logistics management within the road and/or rail transport, distribution, warehousing, storage and stevedoring industry sectors
b. Works under general guidance on progress and outcomes of work c. Work requires discretion and judgment for self and others in planning and using
resources, services and processes to achieve required outcomes within workplace policy and procedures
d. A range of opportunities may be used to develop the work area and to support the development of work systems, innovative strategies to deal with contingencies and to encourage the achievement of the workplace’s goals and key performance objectives by the work area concerned and the individuals and teams within it
e. Applies to those with responsibility for resource coordination and allocation and providing leadership to others individually or in teams
2. Worksite
environment (as it applies to the competency unit concerned)
a. Work may be undertaken in various logistics management environments in the Road and/or Rail Transport, Warehousing, Storage, Distribution and Stevedoring Industries
b. Customers may be internal or external c. Operations may be conducted by day or night d. The workplace environment may involve:
d.1. twenty-four hour operation d.2. single and multi-site location d.3. large, medium and small workplaces
e. Forms of transport may include: e.1. road e.2. rail e.3. sea e.4. air e.5. local courier
f. Consultative processes may involve: f.1. employees, supervisors and managers f.2. international and domestic agents, contacts, suppliers and current or potential
clients f.3. relevant local and international authorities, government departments and
institutions f.4. representatives of other enterprises and organisations related to logistics
management f.5. industrial relations and OHS specialists f.6. other professional, maintenance or technical staff
g. Communications systems may involve: g.1. fixed and mobile telephone g.2. fax g.3. email g.4. radio g.5. electronic data transfer of information g.6. RF systems g.7. mail and internal memos
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
286
Range Of Variables (continued) 2. Worksite
environment (continued)
h. Depending on the type of organisation concerned and the local terminology used, workplace procedures may include: h.1. company procedures h.2. enterprise procedures h.3. organisational procedures h.4. established procedures
3. Sources of
information/ documents (as they apply to the competency unit concerned)
a. Documentation/records may include: a.1. Australian and international codes of practice and regulations relevant to logistics
management a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the handling,
storage and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including the ADG and IDG Code
a.3. workplace standard operating procedures (SOPs) and policies a.4. operations manuals, job specifications and procedures and induction
documentation a.5. documentation required to be completed under the relevant regulatory
requirements a.6. guidelines and information on regulatory requirements issued by the relevant
regulatory authorities a.7. Safe Working Limits (SWL) and Working Load Limits (WLL) of transport, handling
and storage options a.8. supplier and/or client instructions a.9. Australian and International standards, criteria and certification requirements a.10. communications using appropriate technology and equipment as well as verbal
or signed communications a.11. data and document control a.12. quality assurance standards and procedures a.13. emergency procedures a.14. relevant competency standards and training materials a.15. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including workplace
agreements and awards a.16. award, enterprise bargaining agreement, other industrial arrangements
a. Documentation/records may be in the form of: a.1. hard copy procedures and instructions a.2. computer files/records a.3. forms and pro forma reports a.4. operational manuals
4. Workplace context a. The workplace context is defined by: a.1. work organisation, procedures and practices a.2. relevant regulations and codes of practice and systems a.3. conditions of service, legislation and industrial agreements including:
a.3.1. workplace agreements and awards a.3.2. State, Federal or Territory legislation and related regulations as they apply to logistics
management and infrastructure
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
287
Range Of Variables (continued) 5. Applicable
State/Territory/ Commonwealth regulations and legislation
a. Applicable regulations and legislation may include: a.1. regulations and codes of practice related to the organisation and management of
the domestic and international transport, movement and storage of goods a.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the handling,
storage and transfer of dangerous goods and hazardous substances, including: a.2.1. Australian and International Dangerous Goods Codes a.2.2. Australian Marine Orders and the International Maritime Dangerous
Goods Code a.2.3. IATA's 'Dangerous Goods by Air' regulations a.2.4. Australian and International Explosives Codes
a.3. other sections of the Marine Orders and other regulations administered by the Australian Maritime Safety Authority (AMSA)
a.4. quarantine regulations administered by the Australian Quarantine and Inspection Service (AQIS)
a.5. customs regulations (export/import/bond requirements) a.6. relevant State/Territory marine authority/port authority regulations a.7. Australian and international standards and certification requirements relevant to
logistics management a.8. relevant State/Territory OHS and environmental protection legislation a.9. water/sewerage regulations a.10. relevant State/Territory road traffic regulations a.11. licence, patent or copyright arrangements a.12. workplace relations regulations a.13. workers compensation regulations
Page © Australian National Training Authority Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
288
Evidence Guide 1. Critical aspects of
evidence to be considered (as they apply to the competency unit concerned)
a. Assessment must confirm appropriate knowledge and skills to: a.1. identify relevant regulations and codes a.2. access appropriate information on relevant regulations and codes a.3. interpret regulations and codes relevant to workplace activities a.4. implement and monitor compliance with regulations and codes a.5. interpret and analyse freight customer/client requirements a.6. carry out appropriate risk analysis of logistics operations a.7. plan and monitor systems and processes needed for logistics management a.8. carry out appropriate risk analysis of logistics operations/systems a.9. complete all required documentation in accordance with regulatory and
workplace requirements a.10. select and use appropriate communications and computing technology a.11. provide customer/client service and work effectively with others a.12. convey and receive information in written, verbal and computer based forms
2. Interdependent assessment of units
a. The unit of competency may be assessed in conjunction with other units that form part of a job role of the person concerned. This may include units from the Transport and Distribution Training Package and other relevant Training Packages.
3. Required
knowledge and skills (as they apply to the competency unit concerned)
a. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice relevant to logistics management
b. Relevant OHS and environmental protection procedures and guidelines c. Relevant customs, bond, quarantine and other legislative requirements including
ADG and IMDG Code and Aviation and Marine Orders d. Workplace/standard operating procedures and policies for the implementation and
monitoring of compliance with regulatory requirements e. Focus of operation of work systems, equipment, management and site operating
systems f. Roles and responsibilities of various workplace personnel in terms of workplace
activities and regulatory requirements g. Site layout h. Problems that may occur when carrying out logistics management, and appropriate
action that can be taken to resolve the problems i. Ability to:
i.1. identify and access information on relevant regulations i.2. read and interpret regulatory requirements, instructions, procedures and labels
relevant to logistics operations i.3. coordinate compliance activities in the workplace i.4. follow processes for monitoring compliance with regulatory requirements i.5. communicate and negotiate effectively with others i.6. identify and solve problems related to compliance with regulatory requirements i.7. resolve conflict situations i.8. identify protective clothing and safety precautions appropriate to the task i.9. deal with contingencies and modify activities dependant on differing workplace
contexts, risk situations and environments i.10. report on operational and compliance related issues
© Australian National Training Authority Page Transport & Distribution Training Package TDT02 (Logistics) to be reviewed by 30 April 2005 Version 2.00
289
Evidence Guide (continued) 4. Resource
implications a. Access is required to opportunities to:
a.1. participate in a range of exercises, case studies and other simulated practical and knowledge assessments that demonstrate the skills and knowledge to carry out relevant logistics management activities, and/or
a.2. carry out relevant logistics management activities in an appropriate range of operational situations
5. Consistency in
performance a. Applies underpinning knowledge and skills when:
a.1. identifying relevant regulations and codes a.2. accessing appropriate information on relevant regulations and codes a.3. interpreting regulations and codes relevant to workplace activities a.4. implementing and monitoring compliance with regulations and codes a.5. completing all required documentation in accordance with regulatory and
workplace requirements b. Shows evidence of application of relevant workplace procedures including:
b.1. relevant Australian and international codes of practice and legislative requirements pertaining to logistics management
b.2. Australian and international regulations and codes of practice for the handling and transport of dangerous goods and hazardous substances
b.3. workplace standard operating procedures and instructions, including quality, safety, customer service, security and housekeeping procedures)
b.4. relevant risk management policies and procedures b.5. relevant OHS and environmental protection policies and procedures b.6. issue and conflict resolution procedures b.7. obtaining assistance from managers/team members when required
c. Action is taken promptly to report any accidents, incidents or non-compliance and other problems in accordance with regulatory requirements and workplace procedures
d. Performance is demonstrated consistently over a period of time and in a suitable range of contexts
e. Recognises and adapts appropriately to cultural differences in the workplace, including modes of behaviour and interactions among staff and others
f. Work is completed systematically with required attention to detail without damage to goods, equipment or personnel
6. Context for
assessment a. Assessment of a logistics management or relevant cross-industry competency unit
must include approved arrangements for the assessment of knowledge and practical competence by a Registered Training Organisation (RTO)
b. Assessment of knowledge may occur: b.1. at a recognised training institution and/or b.2. concurrently with practical assessment carried out through appropriately
simulated role plays, case studies and assessment exercises and/or in a working logistics management environment
c. Practical assessment may occur through appropriately simulated role plays, case studies and assessment exercises and/or in a working logistics management industry environment
d. Assessment of competence must comply with the requirements of relevant regulations